Array ( [1] => Array ( [id] => 1 [status] => 1 [title] => "MATANAT A" tile adhesive [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 2 [product_id] => 1 [language] => en [title] => "MATANAT A" tile adhesive [description] =>

High quality nanotechnology cement based ceramic adhesive with combined polymerization, grey color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.

[more] =>

Product Description

High quality nanotechnology cement based ceramic adhesive with combined polymerization, grey color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg powder slurry to 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous. Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for large-size tiles (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface). 

Right moment for gluing the tile to the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger then tiles can be applied to the surface. This waiting period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing it with the toothed trowel. 
Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust is formed.
Filling of joints can be executed on walls in 24 hours after application of the mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of applying “Matanat A” ceramic adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds limits of +50C- +300C range, required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the mixture in no case should be diluted with water or adhesive substances. After use all the hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Method of Storage

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MATANAT A\" tile adhesive","description":"","keywords":"tile adhesive "} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [2] => Array ( [id] => 2 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA white" mosaic adhesive (white) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 5 [product_id] => 2 [language] => en [title] => "MA white" mosaic adhesive (white) [description] =>

High quality nanotechnology cement based ceramic adhesive, white color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.

[more] =>

Product Description

High quality nanotechnology cement based ceramic adhesive, white color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”. High quality nanotechnology cement based ceramic adhesive, white color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg powder slurry into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of the trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for large-size tiles (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface).

The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This waiting period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of mixture and combing with toothed trowel.

Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed.
Filling of joints can be executed on walls in 24 hours after application of mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of MA White ceramic adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. In case of mosaic bonding in swimming pools it is recommended to use glass mosaic tiles having a layer of paper on their frontal surfaces. After the useful life expiration the MA White mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Method of Storage

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support 

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA white\" mosaic adhesive (white)","description":"","keywords":"mosaic adhesive"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [3] => Array ( [id] => 3 [status] => 1 [title] => "MARBLE-GRANITE" adhesive (grey) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 8 [product_id] => 3 [language] => en [title] => "MARBLE-GRANITE" adhesive (grey) [description] => [more] =>

Product Description

High quality nanotechnology cement based marble-granite adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.  Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg powder slurry into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of the trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for large-size tiles (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface).

The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing with toothed trowel.

Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and the crust formed.
Filling of joints can be executed on walls in 24 hours after application of mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of QRANİYAP adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramic having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the product in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MARBLE-GRANITE\" adhesive (grey)","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [4] => Array ( [id] => 4 [status] => 1 [title] => "MARBLE-GRANITE" adhesive (white) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 11 [product_id] => 4 [language] => en [title] => "MARBLE-GRANITE" adhesive (white) [description] =>

High quality nanotechnology cement based marble-granite adhesive, white color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.

[more] =>

Product Description

High quality nanotechnology cement based marble-granite adhesive, white color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.  Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages


Application procedures

Preparation of surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder slurry into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of the trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for large-size tiles (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface).

The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing with toothed trowel. 
Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed.
Filling of joints can be executed on walls in 24 hours after application of mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of QRANİYAP White adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the product in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all the hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MARBLE-GRANITE\" adhesive (white)","description":"","keywords":"\"MARBLE-GRANITE\" adhesive (white)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [5] => Array ( [id] => 5 [status] => 1 [title] => "HYDROELASTIC" adhesive, resistance to water (grey) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 14 [product_id] => 5 [language] => en [title] => "HYDROELASTIC" adhesive, resistance to water (grey) [description] =>

Nanotechnology cement based hydro-elastic adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage, provides waterproofing in humid Fields of Application, and has specific adhesive force and high elasticity.

[more] =>

Product Description

Nanotechnology cement based hydro-elastic adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage, provides waterproofing in humid Fields of Application, and has specific adhesive force and high elasticity. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder mix into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for 60х60 cm and larger size facing tiles (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface). 
The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing it with toothed trowel. 
Prepared mixture should be used within 2 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed.
Filling of joints can be executed: on walls in 24 hours after application of the mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of HİDROYAP adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the product in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

Amount of adhesive consumed (in kg) per 1 m2 surface depends on thickness of adhesive layer applied onto the surface during the working period and dimensions of trowel teeth:

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"HYDROELASTIC\" adhesive, resistance to water (grey)","description":"","keywords":"adhesive, resistance to water"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [6] => Array ( [id] => 6 [status] => 1 [title] => "HYDROELASTIC" adhesive, resistance to water (white) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 17 [product_id] => 6 [language] => en [title] => "HYDROELASTIC" adhesive, resistance to water (white) [description] =>

Nanotechnology cement based hydro-elastic adhesive, white color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage, provides waterproofing in wet Fields of Application and has specific adhesive force and high elasticity.

[more] =>

Product Description

Nanotechnology cement based hydro-elastic adhesive, white color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage, provides waterproofing in wet Fields of Application and has specific adhesive force and high elasticity. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder mix into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of the trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for 60х60 cm and larger size facing tiles (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface).

The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of mixture and combing with a toothed trowel.

Prepared mixture should be used within 2 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed.

Filling of joints can be executed: on walls in 24 hours after application of mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of HİDROYAP White adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the product in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. 

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"HYDROELASTIC\" adhesive, resistance to water (white)","description":"","keywords":"adhesive, resistance to water "} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [7] => Array ( [id] => 7 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA Flex" tile adhesive (grey) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 20 [product_id] => 7 [language] => en [title] => "MA Flex" tile adhesive (grey) [description] =>

High quality nanotechnology cement based adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage, resistant to instant temperature changes. 

[more] =>

Product Description

High quality nanotechnology cement based adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage, resistant to instant temperature changes. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder mix into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of the trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for large-size tiles applied in areas with heavy temperature changes (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface).

The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing it with a toothed trowel. Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed. Filling of joints can be executed: on walls in 24 hours after application of the mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of MA Flex adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the product in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA Flex\" tile adhesive (grey)","description":"\"MA Flex\" tile adhesive (grey)","keywords":"\"MA Flex\" tile adhesive (grey)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [8] => Array ( [id] => 8 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA Flex white" flex tile adhesive (white) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 23 [product_id] => 8 [language] => en [title] => "MA Flex white" flex tile adhesive (white) [description] => [more] =>

Product Description

Resistant adhesive for stoves and icehouses. High quality nanotechnology cement based adhesive, white color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage, resistant to instant temperature changes. 
Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder mix into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of the trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for large-size tiles applied in areas with rapid temperature changes (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface).

The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing it with a toothed trowel.

Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed. Filling of joints can be executed on walls in 24 hours after application of mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of MA Flex White adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the product in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA Flex white\" flex tile adhesive (white)","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [9] => Array ( [id] => 9 [status] => 1 [title] => "EKOMAT" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 26 [product_id] => 9 [language] => en [title] => "EKOMAT" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey) [description] =>

High quality nanotechnology cement based complex mixture adhesive, grey color, monocomponent,  enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.

[more] =>

Product Description

High quality nanotechnology cement based complex mixture adhesive, grey color, monocomponent,  enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder mix into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous. Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing it with toothed trowel.

Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed. Filling of joints can be executed on walls in 24 hours after application of mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of EKOMAT adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the product in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"EKOMAT\" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey)","description":"\"EKOMAT\" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey)","keywords":"\"EKOMAT\" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [10] => Array ( [id] => 10 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA Kontakt" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 29 [product_id] => 10 [language] => en [title] => "MA Kontakt" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey) [description] =>

High quality nanotechnology cement based rapid-hardening adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, widely applicable, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.

[more] =>

Product Description

Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”. High quality nanotechnology cement based rapid-hardening adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, widely applicable, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages


Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder mix into 5.0 - 5.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of the trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing it with toothed trowel.

Prepared mixture should be used within 45 minutes. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed.

Filling of joints can be executed on walls in 4 hours after application of the mixture, and in 6 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of MA kontakt adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the MA kontakt mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the MA kontakt adhesive can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA Kontakt\" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey)","description":"\"MA Kontakt\" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey)","keywords":"\"MA Kontakt\" adhesive for small and medium sized ceramic tiles (grey)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [11] => Array ( [id] => 11 [status] => 1 [title] => "PENABET" adhesive for aerated concrete blocks [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 32 [product_id] => 11 [language] => en [title] => "PENABET" adhesive for aerated concrete blocks [description] =>

Nanotechnology cement based gas concrete and/or foamed concrete adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures providing high results.

[more] =>

Product Description

Nanotechnology cement based gas concrete and/or foamed concrete adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, enriched with mixtures providing high results. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used before application of construction materials manufactured from foamed concrete and gas concrete: the surface should be sound, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder mix into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply the equal thickness layer of adhesive both onto the surface of the partially errected wall and onto the lateral sides of materials used to build the wall. In case the lower part has any distortion, repair the initial row using cement-and-sand slurry until it is leveled. Thereafter it is not required to align sequential rows.
Try not to permit the horizontal and vertical joints exceed maximum 3 mm during construction. Take care to fill these joints totally.

Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of PENABET adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After the useful life expiration the PENABET mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the MA kontakt adhesive can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"PENABET\" adhesive for aerated concrete blocks","description":"\"PENABET\" adhesive for aerated concrete blocks","keywords":"\"PENABET\" adhesive for aerated concrete blocks"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [12] => Array ( [id] => 12 [status] => 1 [title] => "FASKER 100" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 35 [product_id] => 12 [language] => en [title] => "FASKER 100" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder) [description] =>

Nanotechnology cement based facing tile adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, including specific polymeric additives providing high results, frost-proof, capable to bonding at high altitudes, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.

[more] =>

Product Description

Nanotechnology cement based facing tile adhesive, grey color, monocomponent, including specific polymeric additives providing high results, frost-proof, capable to bonding at high altitudes, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder mix into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous. Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of the trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for large-size tiles (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface).

The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing it with toothed trowel.

When using large-size facing materials, apply the adhesive in horizontal direction, and do not start laying the next row before the previously completed row has achieved the initial resistance force. Leave one spacing gap each 3.5 m in vertical direction.  Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed. Filling of joints can be executed on walls in 24 hours after application of mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of FASKER 100 adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the FASKER 100 mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the FASKER 100 adhesive can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FASKER 100\" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder)","description":"\"FASKER 100\" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder)","keywords":"\"FASKER 100\" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [13] => Array ( [id] => 13 [status] => 1 [title] => "FASKER 200" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder+liquid) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 38 [product_id] => 13 [language] => en [title] => "FASKER 200" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder+liquid) [description] =>

Nanotechnology cement acrylic based facing tile adhesive, grey color, two-component, including specific polymeric additives providing excellent results, frost-proof, capable to bonding at high altitudes, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.

[more] =>

Product Description

Nanotechnology cement acrylic based facing tile adhesive, grey color, two-component, including specific polymeric additives providing excellent results, frost-proof, capable to bonding at high altitudes, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”. Up to 75 m. height.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. Please pay attention to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture the day before use. In addition the surface to be used should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of powder mix into 7 liters of the liquid and mix till it is entirely homogeneous. Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface using flat side of the trowel. Then trowel over the applied mixture with toothed side of the trowel according to the tile dimensions. It is recommended to use combined method of gluing for large-size tiles (according to this method adhesive is applied onto the surface and combed, and it is applied also onto the back side of the facing tile, whereupon the tile is pressed to the combed surface).

The right moment for gluing the tile onto the surface with applied mixture is defined by fingertip control (pressing) of the mixture. If the mixture sticks to the finger the tiles can be applied to the surface. This period should not exceed 30 minutes. In case the mixture applied to the surface has been coagulated, it should be scrapped, and tiles should be laid after repeated application of the mixture and combing it with toothed trowel.

When using large-size facing materials apply the adhesive in horizontal direction, and do not start to lay the next row before the previous completed row has achieved initial resistance force. Leave one spacing gap each 35 m in vertical direction.  Prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. We do not recommend to use the mixture after this period expired and crust formed. Filling of joints can be executed on walls in 24 hours after application of mixture, and in 48 hours on floorings.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of FASKER 200 adhesive the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. Ceramics having high moisture absorption degree should be saturated with water before use. After the useful life expiration the FASKER 200 mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the FASKER 200 adhesive can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The powder component can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack. The liquid component can be stored during 12 months in plastic containers placed one upon the other in three layers.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FASKER 200\" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder+liquid)","description":"\"FASKER 200\" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder+liquid)","keywords":"\"FASKER 200\" adhesive for facade ceramic tiles (powder+liquid)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [14] => Array ( [id] => 14 [status] => 1 [title] => "EPOKS 100" epoxide-based tile adhesive [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 41 [product_id] => 14 [language] => en [title] => "EPOKS 100" epoxide-based tile adhesive [description] =>

Epoxide resin based (Component A + Component B) ready for application adhesive solution, suitable for bonding different products, such as ceramic, marble, granite, acid-resisting ceramic, glass mosaic, and glass bricks, it is resistant to chemical substances (acids) and bacteria, easily applied, washable with water.

[more] =>

Product Description

Epoxide resin based (Component A + Component B) ready for application adhesive solution, suitable for bonding different products, such as ceramic, marble, granite, acid-resisting ceramic, glass mosaic, and glass bricks, it is resistant to chemical substances (acids) and bacteria, easily applied, washable with water.

Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. The concrete and other surfaces where facing tiles to be applied should be firm and free of any contaminations. Metal surfaces should be totally free of rust and dirt.

Preparation of the mixture. At the time of use mix together both components of the EPOKS 100 solution, and then proceed mixing it during at least 3 minutes by means of 400-600 RPM mixer till it is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Apply the EPOKS 100 solution like all other ceramic adhesives based on cement. After mixing apply the product onto the surface using a suitable toothed trowel and comb the surface. Then stick ceramic tiles to the combed surface.

In the areas of heavily spread primer and exposed to heavy loads apply thin coat of the solution onto the surface subject to adhesion using flat side of the trowel, then apply epoxide resin based adhesive onto the surface once again and comb it with the trowel. After spreading of the solution with the toothed trowel immediately bond ceramic tiles. Do not apply ceramic tiles onto the solution when it started to harden.

Recommendations. The EPOKS 100 solution should be mixed using proper mixing unit. It should be thoroughly mixed by hands or using trowel. Period of use and hardening of adhesive products containing epoxide resins depends on the environmental temperature. The most effective operating temperature range is +100C- +200C. The prepared EPOKS 100 solution mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh solution. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with warm water with powdered detergent.

Shelf Life and Storage Storing

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions, provided freezing  is avoided.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"EPOKS 100\" epoxide-based tile adhesive","description":"\"EPOKS 100\" epoxide-based tile adhesive","keywords":"\"EPOKS 100\" epoxide-based tile adhesive"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [15] => Array ( [id] => 15 [status] => 1 [title] => "EPOKS 100" epoxide based ceramic adhesive [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 44 [product_id] => 15 [language] => en [title] => "EPOKS 100" epoxide based ceramic adhesive [description] =>

Epoxide resin based ready for application adhesive solution, suitable for bonding different products, such as ceramic, marble, granite, acid-resisting ceramic, glass mosaic, and glass bricks, it is resistant to chemical substances (acids) and bacteria, easily applied, washable with water.

[more] =>

Product Description

Epoxide resin based ready for application adhesive solution, suitable for bonding different products, such as ceramic, marble, granite, acid-resisting ceramic, glass mosaic, and glass bricks, it is resistant to chemical substances (acids) and bacteria, easily applied, washable with water. Adhesive conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”. (Component A + Component B).

Fields of Application

This ceramic adhesive can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages


Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. The concrete and other surfaces where facing tiles to be applied should be firm and free of any contaminations. Metal surfaces should be totally free of rust and dirt.

Preparation of the mixture. At the time of use mix together both components of the EPOKS 100 White solution, and then proceed mixing it within at least 3 minutes by means of 400-600 RPM mixer until it is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Apply the EPOKS 100 White solution like all other cement based ceramic adhesives. After mixing apply the product onto the surface using suitable toothed trowel and comb it. Then stick ceramic tiles to the combed surface.

In the areas of heavily spread primer and exposed to heavy loads apply a thin coat of the solution onto the surface of subject to adhesion using flat side of the trowel, then apply epoxide resin based adhesive onto the surface once again and comb it with trowel. After spreading the solution with the toothed trowel immediately bond ceramic tiles. Do not apply ceramic tiles onto the solution when it started to harden.

Recommendations. The EPOKS 100 White solution should be mixed using proper mixing unit. It should be thoroughly mixed by hands or using trowel. Period of use and hardening of adhesive products containing epoxide resins depends on the environmental temperature. The most effective operating temperature is +100C - +200C. The prepared EPOKS 100 White solution mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh solution. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with warm water with addition of powdered detergent.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions, providing that freezing to be avoided.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"EPOKS 100\" epoxide based ceramic adhesive","description":"\"EPOKS 100\" epoxide based ceramic adhesive","keywords":"\"EPOKS 100\" epoxide based ceramic adhesive"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [16] => Array ( [id] => 16 [status] => 1 [title] => "FugaFil" grout joint filler for indoor applications (1-6 mm) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 47 [product_id] => 16 [language] => en [title] => "FugaFil" grout joint filler for indoor applications (1-6 mm) [description] =>

Nanotechnology cement based joint filling mixture, enriched with mixtures increasing resistance to cracks, improving color retention and other physical and mechanical properties. The product is manufactured in color available at the time of order placement.

[more] =>

Product Description

Nanotechnology cement based joint filling mixture, enriched with mixtures increasing resistance to cracks, improving color retention and other physical and mechanical properties. The product is manufactured in color available at the time of order placement. The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 321-2008 (TSEN 13888) standard.

Fields of Application

This joint filling mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of surfaces. Please be careful to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of oil and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 20kg powder mix to 7.0 –7.4 liters of water and mix until it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Spread the mixture over the surface, then fill joints in a criss-cross manner using rubber trowel and strike off extra amount. Clean the surface using wet sponge in 20-30 minutes. Once dry treat the surface using coarse chintz to give it brilliance. Prepared mixture should be used within 2 hours. Do not use the mixture after this period expired. Keep an eye on the amount of water added to powder mix, do not use it if it is too watery. Application of product with excessive water may cause cracks, concaves, quick erosion, dusting and color change.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of FugaFil joint filling mixture the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After the useful life expiration the mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. Joints in ceramics with high water absorption properties should be saturated with water before application of the mixture. The treated area can be put into operation in 24-48 hours after accomplishment of the joint filling operations. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FugaFil\" grout joint filler for indoor applications (1-6 mm)","description":"\"FugaFil\" grout joint filler for indoor applications (1-6 mm)","keywords":"\"FugaFil\" grout joint filler for indoor applications (1-6 mm)"} [consumption_name] => Coverage rate for seam 1 mm - 1 mm depth [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [17] => Array ( [id] => 17 [status] => 1 [title] => "FugaFas 100" facade joint filler (1-6 mm) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 50 [product_id] => 17 [language] => en [title] => "FugaFas 100" facade joint filler (1-6 mm) [description] =>

Cement based joint filling mixture, enriched with mixtures increasing material quality and resistance to cracks, enhancing potential of the product usage, improving the properties of waterproofing, color retention and smoothness of the surfaces. The product is manufactured in color available at the time of order placement.

[more] =>

Product Description

Cement based joint filling mixture, enriched with mixtures increasing material quality and resistance to cracks, enhancing potential of the product usage, improving the properties of waterproofing, color retention and smoothness of the surfaces. The product is manufactured in color available at the time of order placement. The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 321-2008 (TSEN 13888) standard.

Fields of Application

This joint filling mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages


Method of application

Preparation of surfaces. Please be careful to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of oil and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 20kg powder mix to 7.0 –7.4 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application. During mixing keep an eye on the amount of water, do not use if it is too watery. Application of product with excess of water may cause cracks, concaves, quick erosion, dusting and color change.

Application. Spread the mixture over the surface, then fill joints in a criss-cross manner using rubber trowel and strike off extra amounts. Clean the surface using wet sponge in 20-30 minutes. Once dry, treat the surface using coarse chintz to give it brilliance. Prepared mixture should be used within 2 hours. Do not use the mixture after this period expired.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of FugaFas 100 joint filling mixture the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After the useful life expiration the mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. The treated area can be put into operation in 24-48 hours after accomplishment of the filling operations. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FugaFas 100\" facade joint filler (1-6 mm)","description":"\"FugaFas 100\" facade joint filler (1-6 mm)","keywords":"\"FugaFas 100\" facade joint filler (1-6 mm)"} [consumption_name] => Coverage rate for seam 1 mm - 1 mm depth [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [18] => Array ( [id] => 18 [status] => 1 [title] => "FugaFas 200" flex joint filler (6-20 mm) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 53 [product_id] => 18 [language] => en [title] => "FugaFas 200" flex joint filler (6-20 mm) [description] =>

For outdoor applications cement based joint filling mixture, enriched with mixtures increasing material quality and resistance to cracks, enhancing potential of the product usage, improving the properties of waterproofing, color retention and smoothness of surfaces. The product is manufactured in colors available at the time of the order placement.

[more] =>

Product Description

For outdoor applications cement based joint filling mixture, enriched with mixtures increasing material quality and resistance to cracks, enhancing potential of the product usage, improving the properties of waterproofing, color retention and smoothness of surfaces. The product is manufactured in colors available at the time of the order placement.

The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 321-2008 (TSEN 13888) standard.

Fields of Application

This joint filling mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Please be careful to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of oil and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 20kg powder mix into 5.0 –5.4 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application. During mixing keep an eye on the amount of water, do not use if it is too watery. Application of product with excessive water content may cause cracks, concaves, quick erosion, dusting and color change.

Application. Fill the joints with prepared mixture using applicator gun, then strike off extra amounts of the mixture. Prepared mixture should be used within 2 hours. Do not use the mixture after this period expired.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of FugaFas 200 joint filling mixture the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After the useful life expiration the FugaFas 200 joint filling mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. The treated area can be put into operation in 24-48 hours after accomplishment of the joint filling operations. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the FugaFas 200 joint filling mixture can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FugaFas 200\" flex joint filler (6-20 mm)","description":"\"FugaFas 200\" flex joint filler (6-20 mm)","keywords":"\"FugaFas 200\" flex joint filler (6-20 mm)"} [consumption_name] => Coverage rate for seam 1 mm - 1 mm depth [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [19] => Array ( [id] => 19 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA Pool" antibacterial grout joint filler (1-6 mm) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 56 [product_id] => 19 [language] => en [title] => "MA Pool" antibacterial grout joint filler (1-6 mm) [description] =>

Cement based elastic joint filling mixture, enriched with mixtures increasing material quality and resistance to cracks, enhancing potential of the product usage, improving the properties of waterproofing, color retention and smoothness of surfaces, designated for humid areas. The product is manufactured in colors available at the time of order placement.

[more] =>

Product Description

Cement based elastic joint filling mixture, enriched with mixtures increasing material quality and resistance to cracks, enhancing potential of the product usage, improving the properties of waterproofing, color retention and smoothness of surfaces, designated for humid areas. The product is manufactured in colors available at the time of order placement. The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 321-2008 (TSEN 13888) standard.

Fields of Application

This joint filling mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Please be careful to the surface to be used: it should be firm, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of oil and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force.

Preparation of mixture. Carefully pour 20kg powder mix to 7.0 –7.4 liters of water and mix until it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again before application.

Application. Spread the mixture over the surface, then fill joints in a criss-cross manner using rubber trowel and strike off extra amounts. Clean the surface using wet sponge in 20-30 minutes. Once it is dry treat the surface using coarse chintz to give it brilliance. Prepared mixture should be used within 2 hours. Do not use the mixture after this period expired. Keep an eye on the amount of water added to powder mix, do not use if it is too watery. Application of product with excessive water may cause cracks, concaves, quick erosion, dusting and color change.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of MA Pool joint filling mixture the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After the useful life expiration the MA Pool joint filling mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. The treated area can be put into operation in 24-48 hours after execution of joint filling works. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA Pool\" antibacterial grout joint filler (1-6 mm)","description":"\"MA Pool\" antibacterial grout joint filler (1-6 mm)","keywords":"\"MA Pool\" antibacterial grout joint filler (1-6 mm)"} [consumption_name] => Coverage rate for seam 1 mm - 1 mm depth [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [20] => Array ( [id] => 20 [status] => 1 [title] => "EPOKS 200" epoxide based grout-joint filler [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 59 [product_id] => 20 [language] => en [title] => "EPOKS 200" epoxide based grout-joint filler [description] =>

Epoxide resin based joint filling mixture, resistant to chemical substances and bacteria, easily applied for filling joints (pores) of various products, such as ceramics, marble, granite, acid-resisting ceramics, glass mosaic, and glass bricks, washable with water.

[more] =>

Product Description

Epoxide resin based joint filling mixture, resistant to chemical substances and bacteria, easily applied for filling joints (pores) of various products, such as ceramics, marble, granite, acid-resisting ceramics, glass mosaic, and glass bricks, washable with water. The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 321-2008 (TSEN 13888) standard. (Component A + Component B).

Fields of Application

This joint filling mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Similar to ceramic adhesives, the applied adhesive needs some time to reach required level of hardness. Before application of the solution please take care of the ceramic surface to be used: it should be clean, and any existing contaminations should be removed.

Preparation of the mixture. The EPOKS 200 product is a two-component joint filling mixture, so it has been packed in corresponding amounts. In case you plan to use only part of the package, the Component A (epoxide resin based adhesive) should be mixed with the hardening Component B in 100%(A)/4%(B) proportion. At the time of application both components should be mixed during at least 3 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer to make the mixture entirely homogeneous).

Application. Fill joints in a criss-cross manner with EPOKS 200 joint filling mixture using plastic or rubber trowel or pneumatic applicator gun filled by means of suction, then strike off extra amounts. In case a joint has large depth make sure it has been entirely filled, as the applied solution can settle. Wait for 15-30 minutes depending on the environmental and surface temperature, then clean the surfaces using suitable sponge soaked with hot water and detergent dissolved in it, to achieve required conditions. Frequently replace the contaminated sponge during cleaning.

Substances based on epoxide resin when used to fill the joints (pores) form layers similar to thin film on the ceramic surfaces. Thoroughly remove these layers. If let the moment pass, it will be very difficult to clean.

The last thin layer should be removed from the ceramic surface in 4-10 hours after application using suitable sponge soaked with hot water and detergent dissolved in it. The final cleaning consist of wiping the surface using 10% alcohol in water solution.

Recommendations. The EPOKS 200 solution should be mixed using corresponding mixing unit. It should be thoroughly mixed by hands or using trowel. Period of use and hardening of products containing solution of epoxide resins depends on the environmental temperature. The most effective operating ambient temperature is +100C- +200C. The prepared EPOKS 200 solution mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh solution. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with warm water with addition of powdered detergent.

Consumption

Amount of consumed joint filling mixture varies depending on dimensions of facing tiles, width and depth of joints.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions, provided freezing is avoided.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"EPOKS 200\" epoxide based grout-joint filler","description":"\"EPOKS 200\" epoxide based grout-joint filler","keywords":"\"EPOKS 200\" epoxide based grout-joint filler"} [consumption_name] => Coverage rate for seam 1 mm - 1 mm depth [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [21] => Array ( [id] => 21 [status] => 1 [title] => "EPOKS 200 White" epoxide-based grout-joint filler [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 62 [product_id] => 21 [language] => en [title] => "EPOKS 200 White" epoxide-based grout-joint filler [description] =>

Epoxide resin based joint filling mixture, resistant to chemical substances and bacteria, easily applied for filling joints (pores) of different products, such as ceramics, marble, granite, acid-resisting ceramics, glass mosaic, and glass bricks, washable with water.

[more] =>

Product Description

Epoxide resin based joint filling mixture, resistant to chemical substances and bacteria, easily applied for filling joints (pores) of different products, such as ceramics, marble, granite, acid-resisting ceramics, glass mosaic, and glass bricks, washable with water. The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 321-2008 (TSEN 13888) standard.

Fields of Application

This joint filling mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Similar to ceramic adhesives, the applied adhesive requires some time to reach the required level of hardness. Before application of solution please take care of the ceramic surface to be used: it should be clean, and any existing contaminations should be removed.

Preparation of the mixture. The EPOKS 200 White product is a two-component joint filling mixture, so it has been packed in corresponding amounts. In case you plan to use only part of the package, the Component A (epoxide resin based adhesive) should be mixed with the hardening Component B in 100%(A)/4%(B) proportion. At the time of application both components should be mixed during at least 3 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer until the mixture is entirely homogeneous).

Application. Fill the joints in a criss-cross manner with EPOKS 200 White joint filling mixture using plastic or rubber trowel or pneumatic applicator gun filled by means of suction, then strike off extra amounts. In case a joint has large depth make sure it has been filled entirely, as the applied solution can settle. Wait 15-30 minutes depending on the environmental and surface temperature, then clean the surfaces using suitable sponge soaked with hot water and detergent dissolved in it, to achieve required conditions. Frequently replace the contaminated sponge during the cleaning. Substances based on epoxide resin when used to fill the joints (pores) form layers similar to thin film on the ceramic surfaces. Thoroughly remove these layers. If let the moment pass, it will be very difficult to clean. The last thin layer should be removed from the ceramic surface in 4-10 hours after application, with the help of suitable sponge soaked with hot water and detergent dissolved in it. The final cleaning includes wiping the surface using 10% alcohol in water solution.

Recommendations. The EPOKS 200 White solution should be mixed using corresponding mixing unit. It should be thoroughly mixed by hands or using trowel. Period of use and hardening of the products containing solution of epoxide resins depends on the environmental temperature. The most effective operating temperature is +100C - +200C. The prepared EPOKS 200 White solution mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh solution. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with warm water with addition of powdered detergent.

Consumption

Amount of consumed joint filling mixture varies depending on dimensions of the facing tiles, width and depth of joints.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions, provided  freezing is avoided.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"EPOKS 200 White\" epoxide-based grout-joint filler","description":"\"EPOKS 200 White\" epoxide-based grout-joint filler","keywords":"\"EPOKS 200 White\" epoxide-based grout-joint filler"} [consumption_name] => Coverage rate for seam 1 mm - 1 mm depth [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [22] => Array ( [id] => 22 [status] => 1 [title] => "FugaBlesk" jewel-effect joint filling mixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 65 [product_id] => 22 [language] => en [title] => "FugaBlesk" jewel-effect joint filling mixture [description] =>

Decorative, hygienic and easily removable joint filling mixture provides the effect of gold, silver and brass metal, making the areas of its application more attractive creating brilliant (glimmer) appearance due to jewel-effect particles.

[more] =>

Product Description

Decorative, hygienic and easily removable joint filling mixture provides the effect of gold, silver and brass metal, making the areas of its application more attractive creating brilliant (glimmer) appearance due to jewel-effect particles. The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 321-2008 (TSEN 13888) standard.

Fields of Application

This joint filling mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. The surface to be treated with the product should be dry, and its wetness should not exceed 5% value. The joints should be free of dust, dirt and construction particles, at least 2/3 part should be empty. To make the jewel effect more attractive it is recommended that the joint width should be at least 3mm. At low temperatures the product shows high level of thickening. Due to this reason the temperature in working premises should be kept at the required level (+230C±30C) for 1 (one) day before application of the product. Prior to beginning the work certainly put on protective gloves and glasses.

Preparation of the mixture. At the time of Preparation of the mixture remove the Components A, B, C, and D from their containers and put them aside, then place the full amounts of the Components A, B, and D sequentially into one container and mix them using slow circulation mixer till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Be careful mixing the Component D, as it is very light and volatile. To obtain lustreless appearance the mixture can be prepared without addition of Component D. Then add the C Component into the obtained mixture and mix by the same procedure till it is homogeneous.

Application. Fill the joints in a criss-cross manner using elastic trowel. Strike off extra amounts using the elastic trowel. Clean the surface and joints from the contaminations in 15 minutes after application of FugaBlesk mixture using wet sponge soaked with cold water in the manner of light angular motion. In 24 hours remove the remained contaminations from the surface using coarse chintz. To provide full cleaning of the surface repeat the last operation using vinegar in water solution or acetone.

Recommendations. Do not mix the product with any additional admixtures not indicated in operation instructions. The prepared mixture should be used within 50-minute period at 250C temperature. The effective life period can be affected by environmental and surface temperatures. At high temperatures the effective life of the product increases, and at low temperatures the effective life period decreases. After the useful life expiration the prepared mixture should not be used.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FugaBlesk\" jewel-effect joint filling mixture","description":"\"FugaBlesk\" jewel-effect joint filling mixture","keywords":"\"FugaBlesk\" jewel-effect joint filling mixture"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [24] => Array ( [id] => 24 [status] => 1 [title] => "Fugaton" for surface hardening of concrete joints [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 71 [product_id] => 24 [language] => en [title] => "Fugaton" for surface hardening of concrete joints [description] =>

Gypsum based joint filling mixture, elastic, ready for application, monocomponent, resistant to negative effects of different climatic conditions, ultraviolet radiation and chemical substances available in the environment.

[more] =>

Product Description

Gypsum based joint filling mixture, elastic, ready for application, monocomponent, resistant to negative effects of different climatic conditions, ultraviolet radiation and chemical substances available in the environment. The product conforms to the requirements of ASTM C 920 standard.

Fields of Application

This joint filling mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Prior to beginning the work the area of the product application should be cleaned from dust or other contaminations. Primer  is not required. To prevent spilling of the Fugaton product out of bounds of the joints during application, special ribbons should be stuck.

Application. The product is applied to fill the joints entirely (to prevent further settling of mixture) using the joint filling applicator gun. When filling the joints take care there are no air voids have been formed. After the joint filling the overlaid tape should be removed.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of Fugaton joint filling mixture the environmental temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After the useful life expiration the Fugaton joint filling mixture in no case should be diluted with any other substances. The treated area can be put into operation in 24-48 hours after accomplishment of the joint filling operations. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the Fugaton joint filling mixture can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Consumption

Amount of consumed joint filling mixture varies depending on the width and depth of joints.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"Fugaton\" for surface hardening of concrete joints","description":"\"Fugaton\" for surface hardening of concrete joints","keywords":"\"Fugaton\" for surface hardening of concrete joints"} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => İstifadə olunan beton səthində kəsilmiş aralıqların ölçülərindən asılı olaraq dəyişkəndir. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [25] => Array ( [id] => 25 [status] => 1 [title] => "Filkret 100" repair mortar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 74 [product_id] => 25 [language] => en [title] => "Filkret 100" repair mortar [description] =>

Cement based, enriched with mixtures, surface repairing mixture, provides waterproofing properties for materials, monocomponent.  “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

[more] =>

Product Description

Cement based, enriched with mixtures, surface repairing mixture, provides waterproofing properties for materials, monocomponent. The product conforms to the requirements of the 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard: “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Clean the surface from any residues deteriorating adhesive force. Pay attention to ensuring rigidity of the surface. Prior to application of the product the surface to be used should be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour 25 kg of Filkret 100 powder mix to 5.5 – 6.0 liters of water and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Wait for 3-5 minutes to allow the substances composing the mixture to intermix completely, then mix again before application.

Application. Using trowel completely fill tears and cracks existing on the surface. Allowable thickness of the product layer is 1-5mm. The prepared mixture should be used within 90-120 minutes.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of the Filkret 100 repair mixture the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After the useful life expiration the mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the product can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Consumption

The required amount of  the mixture consumed to obtain 1mm thick layer shall be 1.5-2.0 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"Filkret 100\" repair mortar","description":"\"Filkret 100\" repair mortar","keywords":"\"Filkret 100\" repair mortar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [26] => Array ( [id] => 26 [status] => 1 [title] => "Filkret 200" repair-mounting mortar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 77 [product_id] => 26 [language] => en [title] => "Filkret 200" repair-mounting mortar [description] =>

Filkret 200 sement əsaslı, tək komponentli, polimerləşdirilmiş yüksək stabilliyə malik quru betonun təmiri üçün qarışıqdır.

[more] =>

Product Description

Filkret 200 sement əsaslı, tək komponentli, polimerləşdirilmiş yüksək stabilliyə malik quru betonun təmiri üçün qarışıqdır. AZS 039 (TS-11140) standartına uyğundur.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Cement based surfaces to be repaired should be rigid, clean and dust-free, they should be totally free of any fat, rust, and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. The surface should be cleaned from metal and wooden particles, and all cavities up to 4cm deep should be filled with MATON 200 repair mixture. Provide water saturation of the surface to be treated with the mixture, however there should not be free water remained on the surface.

Preparation of mixture. Pour appropriate amount of water measured with a measuring device into clean container, and gradually add the Filkret 200 repair mixture. Prepare this mixture for 4 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the mixture becomes entirely homogeneous. Mix again in approximately 4 minutes during 30-minute period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface to form a 1 – 30mm thick layer with the help of a trowel. Let the mixture dry, splash water on the mixture surface using plaster brush. Then correct the surface in required manner using steel or wooden trowel. In case of applying the Filkret 200 product in the open area on large open surfaces, especially in warm, dry and windy weather conditions, prevent evaporation of the solution during 24-48 hours using soaked cloth, duck fabric, or any other active solution.

Recommendations. Once prepared for repair works the Filkret 200 product should be used within 30 minutes at +200C ambient temperature. For +320C temperature this period is reduced to 20 minutes. In case of the product application on external surfaces they should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and/or frost during 24 hours. Application and reaction rate of cement based systems can be affected by ambient temperature and other conditions, including air humidity. Low temperatures elongate the hydration period, and result in increasing the product effective life. High temperatures reduce the hydration period, and result in decrease of the above mentioned period. To provide full hardening of the mixture the ambient temperature should not drop below the specified minimum values. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The required amount of the mixture consumed to obtain 1mm thick layer shall be 1.55 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"Filkret 200\" repair-mounting mortar","description":"\"Filkret 200\" repair-mounting mortar","keywords":"\"Filkret 200\" repair-mounting mortar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [27] => Array ( [id] => 27 [status] => 1 [title] => "FİLKRET 300" surface finishing and filling mortar under painting [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 80 [product_id] => 27 [language] => en [title] => "FİLKRET 300" surface finishing and filling mortar under painting [description] =>

Filkret 300 is a cement based surface repairing and sealing mixture, monocomponent, polymerizable, having high stability. “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

[more] =>

Product Description

Filkret 300 is a cement based surface repairing and sealing mixture, monocomponent, polymerizable, having high stability. The product conforms to the requirements of the 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard: “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Cement based building surfaces to be repaired should be rigid, clean and dust-free, they should be totally free of any fat, rust, and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. The surface should be cleaned from metal and wooden particles. Provide water saturation of the surface to be treated with the mixture, however there should not be free water remained on the surface.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour appropriate  amount of water measured with a measuring device to clean container, and gradually add the Filkret 300 repair mixture. Prepare this mixture for 4 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Mix again in approximately 4 minutes during 30-minute period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface to form 1 – 5mm thick layer with the help of a trowel. Let the mixture dry, and splash water on the surface of the mixture using plaster brush. Then correct the surface in required manner using steel or wooden trowel. In case of applying the Filkret 300 product in the open area on large open surfaces, especially in warm, dry and windy weather conditions, prevent evaporation of the solution during 24-48 hours using soaked cloth, duck fabric, or any other active solution.

Recommendations. The Filkret 300 repair mixture should not be used under epoxide based paints. The mixture prepared for repair works should be used within 30 minutes at +200C temperature. For +320C temperature this period is reduced to 20 minutes. In case of the product application on external surfaces they should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and/or frost during 24 hours. Application and reaction rate of cement based systems can be affected by environmental and soil temperatures and other conditions, including the air humidity. Low temperatures elongate the hydration period, and result in increase of the product effective life. High temperatures reduce the hydration period, and result in decrease of the above mentioned period. To provide full hardening of the mixture the ambient temperature should not drop below the specified minimum value. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The required amount of the mixture consumed to obtain 1mm thick layer shall be 1.2 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support 

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FİLKRET 300\" surface finishing and filling mortar under painting","description":"\"FİLKRET 300\" surface finishing and filling mortar under painting","keywords":"\"FİLKRET 300\" surface finishing and filling mortar under painting"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [28] => Array ( [id] => 28 [status] => 1 [title] => "FİLKRET 400" dry concrete surface restoration and repair mortar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 83 [product_id] => 28 [language] => en [title] => "FİLKRET 400" dry concrete surface restoration and repair mortar [description] =>

Filkret 400 is a cement based surface repair and restoring mixture, monocomponent, polymerizable, having high stability.  “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

[more] =>

Product Description

Filkret 400 is a cement based surface repair and restoring mixture, monocomponent, polymerizable, having high stability. The product conforms to the requirements of the 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard: “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Cement based building surfaces to be repaired should be rigid, clean and dust-free, they should be totally free of any fat, rust, and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. The surface should be cleaned from metal and wooden particles, and all cavities up to 4cm deep should be filled with MATON 200 repair mixture. Provide water saturation of the surface to be treated with the mixture, however there should not be free water remained on the surface.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour appropriate amount of water measured with the help of a measuring device into clean container, and gradually add the Filkret 400 repair mixture. Prepare this mixture for 4 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Mix again in approximately 4 minutes during 30-minute period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface to form 1 – 30mm thick layer using a trowel. Let the mixture dry, and splash water on the surface of the spread mixture using plaster brush. Then correct the surface in required manner using steel or wooden trowel. In case of applying the Filkret 400 product in the open area on large open surfaces, especially in the warm, dry and windy weather conditions, prevent evaporation of the solution during 24-48 hours using soaked cloth, duck fabric, or any other active solution.

Recommendations. Once prepared for repair works the Filkret 400 product should be used within 30 minutes at +200C temperature. For +320C temperature this period is reduced to 20 minutes. In case of the product application on external surfaces they should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and/or frost during 24 hours. Application and reaction rate of cement based systems can be affected by the ambient temperature and other conditions, including the air humidity. Low temperatures elongate the hydration period, and result in increasing the product effective life. High temperatures reduce the hydration period, and result in decrease of the above mentioned period. To provide full hardening of the mixture the ambient temperature should not drop below the specified minimum value. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the Filkret 400 product can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Consumption

The required amount of the mixture consumed to obtain 1mm thick layer is 1.38 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FİLKRET 400\" dry concrete surface restoration and repair mortar","description":"\"FİLKRET 400\" dry concrete surface restoration and repair mortar","keywords":"\"FİLKRET 400\" dry concrete surface restoration and repair mortar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [29] => Array ( [id] => 29 [status] => 1 [title] => "FİLKRET 500" dry concrete repairing mortar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 86 [product_id] => 29 [language] => en [title] => "FİLKRET 500" dry concrete repairing mortar [description] =>

Filkret 300 is a cement based dry concrete repairing mixture, monocomponent, polymerizable, having high stability. “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

[more] =>

Product Description

Filkret 300 is a cement based dry concrete repairing mixture, monocomponent, polymerizable, having high stability. The product conforms to the requirements of the 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard: “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Cement based surfaces to be repaired should be rigid, clean and dust-free, they should be totally free of any fat, rust, and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. The surface should be cleaned from metal and wooden particles, and all cavities up to 4cm deep should be filled with MATON 200 repair mixture. Provide water saturation of the surface to be treated with the mixture, however there should not be free water remained on the surface.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour appropriate amount of water measured with the help of a measuring device into clean container, and gradually add the Filkret 500 repair mixture. Prepare this mixture for 4 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the mixture becomes entirely homogeneous. Mix again in approximately 4 minutes during 30-minute period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface with to form 1 – 5mm thick layer using trowel. Let the mixture dry, and splash water on the surface of the mixture surface using plaster brush. Then correct the surface in required manner using steel or wooden trowel. In case of applying of the Filkret 500 product in the open area on large open surfaces, especially in the warm, dry and windy weather conditions, prevent evaporation of the solution during 24-48 hours using soaked cloth, duck fabric, or any other active solution.

Recommendations. Once prepared for repair works the Filkret 500 product should be used within 30 minutes at +200C temperature. For +320C temperature this period is reduced to 20 minutes. In case of the product application on external surfaces they should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and/or frost during 24 hours. Application and reaction rate of cement based systems can be affected by the ambient temperature and other conditions, including the air humidity. Low temperatures elongate the hydration period, and result in increase of the product effective life. High temperatures reduce the hydration period, and result in decrease of the above mentioned period. To provide full hardening of the mixture the ambient temperature should not drop below the specified minimum values. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The required amount of the mixture consumed to obtain 1mm thick layer shall be 1.48 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FİLKRET 500\" dry concrete repairing mortar","description":"\"FİLKRET 500\" dry concrete repairing mortar","keywords":"\"FİLKRET 500\" dry concrete repairing mortar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [30] => Array ( [id] => 30 [status] => 1 [title] => "MATON 100" mortar for structure repair works [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 89 [product_id] => 30 [language] => en [title] => "MATON 100" mortar for structure repair works [description] =>

Cement based mixture designed for structural repair works, monocomponent, strengthened with polymeric and fiber substances, smooth, resistant to hydrolysis.

[more] =>

Product Description

Cement based mixture designed for structural repair works, monocomponent, strengthened with polymeric and fiber substances, smooth, resistant to hydrolysis. The product conforms to the requirements of the 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard: “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. The surfaces to be treated with the MATON 100 product should be rigid, clean and dust-free, they should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force. The areas having crumbles or cavities on the edges should be corrected to the maximum extent possible. Rust existing on reinforcing fittings should be removed, in critical situations these fittings should be replaced with new ones. In case there is spilled water on the surface, it should be sponged up, or the water flow should be stopped with a plug. Provide water saturation of the surface to be treated with the mixture, however there should not be free water remained on the surface. In case the thickness of the MATON 100 product layer is higher than 40mm, use additional reinforcing fittings for the purpose of controlled expansion.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour appropriate amount of water measured with a measuring device into the mixing container. Gradually add the MATON 100 product and prepare the mixture for 4 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer. Mix again in approximately 4 minutes during 30-minute period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Pour the prepared product continuously in a single stream line over one side of the mould to obtain just 10 – 40mm thick layer. Do not perform this operation pouring the product from two sides of the mould to avoid air entrapment inside the mould. To avoid formation of cavities inside the mould use a fork-shaped tool. Vibrator should not be used during this operation. Moulds should not be opened within 18-24 hours. When applying the product in the open area on large open surfaces, especially in warm, dry and windy weather conditions, prevent evaporation of the solution during 24-48 hours using soaked cloth, duck fabric, or any other active solution.

Recommendations. Once prepared for repair works the MATON 100 material should be used within 30 minutes at +200C temperature. When applying the product on external surfaces they should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and/or frost during 24 hours. Application and reaction rate of cement based systems can be affected by the ambient temperature and humidity. Low temperature elongates the hydration period, and results in increase of the drying period and effective life. High temperatures reduce the hydration period, and result in decrease of the drying time and effective life. To provide full hardening of the mixture the ambient and surface temperatures should not drop below the required minimum values. The product should not be used if there is risk of contact with solutions which have pH index value below 5.5. On the large surfaces the finishing concrete layer should be applied. After application of the material a vibrator should be used. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The required amount of the product consumed to obtain 10mm thick layer shall be 19.40 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MATON 100\" mortar for structure repair works","description":"\"MATON 100\" mortar for structure repair works","keywords":"\"MATON 100\" mortar for structure repair works"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [31] => Array ( [id] => 31 [status] => 1 [title] => "MATON 200" mortar for structural repair works [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 92 [product_id] => 31 [language] => en [title] => "MATON 200" mortar for structural repair works [description] =>

MATON 200 is a cement based mixture designed for thixotropic structural repair works, monocomponent, strengthened with polymeric and fiber substances.

[more] =>

Product Description

MATON 200 is a cement based mixture designed for thixotropic structural repair works, monocomponent, strengthened with polymeric and fiber substances. The product conforms to the requirements of the 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard: “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. The surfaces to be treated with the MATON 200 product should be rigid, clean and dust-free, they should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force. The areas having crumbles or cavities on the edges should be corrected to the maximum extent possible. Rust existing on the reinforcing fittings should be removed, in critical situations these fittings should be replaced with new ones. In case there is spilled water on the surface, it should be sponged up, or the water flow should be stopped using İzoKontakt 1. Provide water saturation of the surface treated with the mixture, however there should not be free water remained on the surface.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour appropriate amount of water measured with a measuring device into mixing container. Gradually add the MATON 200 product and prepare the mixture for 4 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer. Mix again in approximately 4 minutes during 30-minute period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Apply the prepared product using a trowel or by means of spraying  to obtain a 10 – 40mm thick layer is obtained. To obtain thicker layer wait for the first layer to dry, then apply the second layer the same manner. To obtain a smoother surface wait till water is soaked into the material, then splash additional amount of water on the surface using brush and flatten the surface using wooden trowel. When applying the product in the open area on large open surfaces, especially in the warm, dry and windy weather conditions, prevent evaporation of the solution during 24-48 hours using soaked cloth, duck fabric, or any other active solution.

Recommendations. Once prepared for repair works the MATON 200 repair mixture should be used within 30 minutes at +200C temperature. When the product is applied onto external surfaces they should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and/or frost during 24 hours. Application and reaction rate of cement based systems can be affected by the ambient temperatures and humidity. Low temperature elongates the hydration period, and results in increase of the drying time and the effective life. To provide hardening of the product the ambient and surface temperatures should not drop below the specified minimum values. The product should not be used if there is a risk of contact with solutions having pH index value below 5.5. On large surfaces the finishing concrete layer should be applied. After application of the material a vibrator should be used. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The required amount of the product consumed to obtain 1mm thick layer shall be 1.94 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MATON 200\" mortar for structural repair works","description":"\"MATON 200\" mortar for structural repair works","keywords":"\"MATON 200\" mortar for structural repair works"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [32] => Array ( [id] => 32 [status] => 1 [title] => "MATON 300" mortar for surface leveling and repair works [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 95 [product_id] => 32 [language] => en [title] => "MATON 300" mortar for surface leveling and repair works [description] =>

MATON 300 is a cement based mixture designed for surface repair and leveling works, monocomponent, strengthened with polymeric and fiber substances, providing smoothness of concrete surfaces.

[more] =>

Product Description

MATON 300 is a cement based mixture designed for surface repair and leveling works, monocomponent, strengthened with polymeric and fiber substances, providing smoothness of concrete surfaces. The product conforms to the requirements of the 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard: “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surface. The surfaces to be treated with the MATON 300 product should be rigid, clean and dust-free, they should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force. The surface should be cleaned from metal and wooden particles, and all cavities up to 4cm deep should be filled with MATON 200 repair mixture. Provide water saturation of the surface to be treated with the mixture, however there should not be free water remained on the surface.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour appropriate amount of water measured with a measuring device into the mixing container. Gradually add the MATON 300 product and prepare the mixture for 4 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer. Mix again in approximately 4 minutes during 30-minute period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface to obtain 1 – 5mm thick layer, using trowel. Wait till water will be soaked into the mixture, then splash water on the surface of the applied material and complete treatment of the surface using steel or wooden trowel. When applying the product in the open area on large open surfaces, especially in warm, dry and windy weather conditions, prevent evaporation of the solution during 24-48 hours using soaked cloth, duck fabric, or any other active solution.

Recommendations. Once prepared for repair works the MATON 300 product should be used within 45 minutes at +200C temperature. For +300C temperature this period is reduced to 20-25 minutes. Application and reaction rate of cement based systems can be affected by the ambient temperatures and humidity. Low temperature elongates the hydration period, and results in increase of the drying time and effective life. High temperatures reduces the hydration period, and result in decreasing the drying time and effective life. To provide hardening of the material the ambient and surface temperatures should not drop below the specified minimum values. When the product is applied onto external surfaces they should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and/or frost during 24 hours. After application of the material a vibrator should be used. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the MATON 300 product can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Consumption

The required amount of the powder mix consumed to obtain 1mm thick layer shall be 1.72 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MATON 300\" mortar for surface leveling and repair works","description":"\"MATON 300\" mortar for surface leveling and repair works","keywords":"\"MATON 300\" mortar for surface leveling and repair works"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [33] => Array ( [id] => 33 [status] => 1 [title] => "MATON 400" high resistant repair fast setting mortar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 98 [product_id] => 33 [language] => en [title] => "MATON 400" high resistant repair fast setting mortar [description] =>

MATON 400 is a cement based mixture designed for repair works which require quick hardening ability; monocomponent, resistant to hydrolysis, smooth, strengthened with polymeric and fiber substances.

[more] =>

Product Description

MATON 400 is a cement based mixture designed for repair works which require quick hardening ability; monocomponent, resistant to hydrolysis, smooth, strengthened with polymeric and fiber substances. The product conforms to the requirements of the 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard: “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. The surfaces to be treated with the MATON 400 product should be rigid, clean and dust-free, they should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force. The areas having crumbles or cavities on the edges should be corrected to the maximum extent possible. In case there is spilled water on the surface, it should be sponged up, or the water flow should be stopped using İzoKontakt 1. Provide water saturation of the surface to be treated with the mixture, however there should not be free water remained on the surface.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour appropriate amount of water measured with a measuring device into the mixing container. Gradually add the MATON 400 product and prepare the mixture for 4 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer. Mix again in approximately 4 minutes during 30-minute period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface to obtain 10 – 50mm thick layer. Open the moulds in 15 minutes. In case thickness above 50mm is required, mix the MATON 400 product with fine filler (5-10mm) in 1/2 proportion (1kg of a filler per 2 kg of the powder).

Recommendations. The MATON 400 repair mixture should be used within 7 minutes at +200C temperature. Application and reaction rate of cement based systems can be affected by the ambient and soil temperatures and other conditions, including air humidity. Low temperature elongates the hydration period, and results in increase of the drying time and effective life. To provide full hardening of the material the ambient and soil temperatures should not drop below the specified minimum. When applied using fine filler, the substances should be dry mixed and added to the mixing container full of water. Amount of water in this mixture should not exceed 10%. The MATON 400 product may be applied on the soil. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The required amount of the powder mix consumed to obtain 1mm thick layer is 2 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MATON 400\" high resistant repair fast setting mortar","description":"\"MATON 400\" high resistant repair fast setting mortar","keywords":"\"MATON 400\" high resistant repair fast setting mortar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [34] => Array ( [id] => 34 [status] => 1 [title] => "MATON 500" high resistant fast setting repair mortar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 101 [product_id] => 34 [language] => en [title] => "MATON 500" high resistant fast setting repair mortar [description] =>

MATON 500 is a cement based mixture designed for repair works which require quick hardening ability; monocomponent, polymerizable, resistant to hydrolysis and breaking, smooth.

[more] =>

Product Description

MATON 500 is a cement based mixture designed for repair works which require quick hardening ability; monocomponent, polymerizable, resistant to hydrolysis and breaking, smooth. The product conforms to the requirements of the 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard: “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”. More smooth and more resistant.

Fields of Application

This repair mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Cement based surfaces should be rigid, clean and dust-free. The surface should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force. Edges of the surfaces restored by means of breaking should be cut smooth, rust existing on equipment should be removed, new equipment should be added, if necessary. In case there is spilled water on the surface, it should be sponged up, or the water flow should be stopped using İzoKontakt 1. Provide water saturation of the surface to be treated with the mixture, however there should not be free water remained on the surface.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour appropriate amount of water measured with a measuring device into the mixing container. Gradually add the MATON 500 product and prepare the mixture for 4 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer. Mix again in approximately 4 minutes during 30-minute period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application. 

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface to obtain a 10 – 50mm thick layer. Open the moulds in 15 minutes. In case a layer thickness above 50mm is required, mix the MATON 500 product with fine filler (5-10mm) in 1/2 proportion (1kg of filler per 2 kg of the powder).

Recommendations. The MATON 500 repair mixture should be used within 7 minutes at +200C temperature. Application and reaction rate of cement based systems can be affected by the ambient and soil temperatures and other conditions, including air humidity. Low temperature elongates the hydration period, and results in increase of the drying time and effective life. To provide full hardening of the material the ambient and soil temperatures should not drop below the specified minimum values. When applying the mixture  with fine fillers the substances should be dry mixed first and then added to the mixing container with water till the water content in this mixture reaches 10%. The MATON 500 product may be applied on the soil. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The required amount of the powder mix consumed to obtain 1mm thickness layer shall be 2 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed one upon the other in three layers. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another. The product in unpacked sacks should be used within one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MATON 500\" high resistant fast setting repair mortar","description":"\"MATON 500\" high resistant fast setting repair mortar","keywords":"\"MATON 500\" high resistant fast setting repair mortar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [35] => Array ( [id] => 35 [status] => 1 [title] => "EPOKS 300" epoxide based repair mortar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 104 [product_id] => 35 [language] => en [title] => "EPOKS 300" epoxide based repair mortar [description] =>

Product for fastening, mounting, conjoining, and adhesive bonding works, two-component.

[more] =>

Product Description

Product for fastening, mounting, conjoining, and adhesive bonding works, two-component. Code of conformity: 04.613/8-e.

Fields of Application

This solution can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Method of application

Preparation of the surfaces. Cement based surfaces (concrete, plaster, etc.) or layers should be cleaned from all contaminations. Metal surfaces should be totally cleaned from rust and contaminations.

Preparation of the mixture. The EPOKS 300 product is two-component joint filling mixture, so it has been packed in corresponding amounts. At the time of application both components should be mixed during at least 3 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. During the mixing process +150C to +250C temperature of the solution should be provided.

Mixture preparation proportions:

Component A: epoxide resin 3.75 kg;

Component B: epoxide based hardening agent 1.25 kg.

Application. Spread the EPOKS 300 product over the surface using trowel. Thoroughly clean the holes in reinforcing fitting structures by compressed air. The width of opened holes should not exceed the width of joined components more than by 6mm. The product can be applied easily using spray gun.

Recommendations. The EPOKS 300 solution should be mixed using a suitable mixing unit. The mixture should be thoroughly mixed by hands or using trowel. Period of use and hardening of products containing solution of epoxide resins depends on the ambient temperature. The most effective operating temperature range is +100C - +200C. The prepared mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh solution. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with warm water with addition of powdered detergent.

Consumption

The amount of consumed repair mixture changes depending on the form and depth of cracks.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions, provided freezing is avoided.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"EPOKS 300\" epoxide based repair mortar","description":"\"EPOKS 300\" epoxide based repair mortar","keywords":"\"EPOKS 300\" epoxide based repair mortar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [36] => Array ( [id] => 36 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoLatexe 4000" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 107 [product_id] => 36 [language] => en [title] => "İzoLatexe 4000" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar [description] =>

For water basins and technical water reservoirs.

[more] =>

Product description

Composition of powder: Cement based dry mixture resistant to chemicals. Composition of liquid: Acrylic based emulsion polymer. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZS 31 43498-05-2005 specifications. For water basins and technical water reservoirs.

Fields of Application

This insulating mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Clean the surface from any residues deteriorating adhesive force. Pay attention to ensuring rigidity of the surface. In case the surface to be used has any defects, they should be removed using  MATON 100 repair mixture. Before application of the product the surface should be primed with BINMADER primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg powder mix into 10 liters of white liquid composite and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Wait 3-5 minutes to allow complete mixing of substances composing the mixture, mix again before application.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface in two layers, using roller or brush. The layers should be applied perpendicular to each other. The time between application of layers may be 5-6 hours, depending on the ambient temperature. To prevent formation of cracks in the corners of the product application area, the oval shape should be given to the corners, and the mixture should be reinforced with mesh. The prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. Do not use the mixture after expiration of this period.

Recommendations. The surface treated with the mixture should be protected from direct sun rays, precipitations and dust for 48 hours, and the product should not be used in the areas of direct solar radiation. As the product is applied in thin layers, after its application onto the surfaces to be subject to pedestrian flows and vehicles traffic it should be treated with protective facing materials, such as concrete flooring plaster and ceramic tiles.

The surfaces should be put into operation or covered with facing plates in at least 1 week after application of the mixture.

Consumption

The İzoLatexe  4000 waterproofing mixture is applied onto the surface in 2 layers:

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The powder composite component can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack, and the liquid component can be stored during 12 months in plastic cans placed one upon the other in three layers.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoLatexe 4000\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar","description":"\"İzoLatexe 4000\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar","keywords":"\"İzoLatexe 4000\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² (for one layer) [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [37] => Array ( [id] => 37 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoLatexe Eko" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 2 bar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 110 [product_id] => 37 [language] => en [title] => "İzoLatexe Eko" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 2 bar [description] =>

For bath-houses, toilet rooms, balconies, and technical water reservoirs.

[more] =>

Product description

Composition of powder: Cement based dry mixture resistant to chemicals. Composition of liquid: Acrylic based emulsion polymer. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZS 31 43498-05-2005 specifications. For bath-houses, toilet rooms, balconies, and technical water reservoirs.

Fields of Application

This insulating mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of surface. Clean the surface from any residues deteriorating adhesive force. Pay attention to ensuring rigidity of the surface. In case the surface to be used has any defects, they should be removed using MATON 100 repair mixture. Before application of the product the surface should be primed with BINMADER primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg powder mix into 10 liters of white liquid composite and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Wait 3-5 minutes to allow complete mixing of the substances composing the mixture, mix again before application.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface in two layers using roller or brush. The layers should be applied perpendicular to each other. The time between application of layers may be 5-6 hours, depending on the ambient temperature. To prevent formation of cracks in the corners of the product application area, the oval shape should be given to the corners, and the mixture should be reinforced with mesh. The prepared mixture should be used within 3 hours. Do not use the mixture after expiration of this period.

Recommendations. The surface treated with the mixture should be protected from direct sun rays, precipitations and dust for 48 hours, and the product should not be used in the areas of direct solar radiation. As the product is applied in thin layers, after its application onto the surfaces to be subject to pedestrian flows and vehicles traffic it should be treated with protective facing materials, such as concrete flooring plaster and ceramic tiles. The surfaces should be put into operation or covered with facing plates in at least 1 week after application of the mixture.

Consumption

The İzoLatexe  Eko waterproofing mixture is applied onto the surface in 2 layers.

First layer consumption: 1.2  kg/m2.

Second layer consumption: 1.0  kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The powder composite component can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack, and the liquid component can be stored during 12 months in plastic cans placed one upon the other in three layers.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoLatexe Eko\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 2 bar","description":"\"İzoLatexe Eko\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 2 bar","keywords":"\"İzoLatexe Eko\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 2 bar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [38] => Array ( [id] => 38 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoLatexe SUPER" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 113 [product_id] => 38 [language] => en [title] => "İzoLatexe SUPER" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar [description] =>

For technical water reservoirs, extra waterproofing.

[more] =>

Product description

Composition of powder: Cement based dry mixture resistant to chemicals. Composition of liquid: Acrylic based emulsion polymer. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZS 31 43498-05-2005 specifications. For technical water reservoirs, extra waterproofing.

Fields of Application

This insulating mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. Clean the surface from any residues deteriorating adhesive force. Pay attention to ensuring rigidity of the surface. In case the surface to be used has any defects, they should be removed using MATON 100 repair mixture. Before application of the product the surface should be primed with BINMADER primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 20 kg powder mix into 10 liters of white liquid composite and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer).

Application. Wait 3-5 minutes while the mixture is curing, then mix again before application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface in 2 or 3 layers using roller or brush. The layers should be applied perpendicular to each other. The time between application of the layers may be 5-6 hours, depending on the ambient temperature. To prevent formation of cracks in the corners of the product application area, the oval shape should be given to the corners, and the mixture should be reinforced with mesh. The prepared mixture should be used within 2 hours. Do not use the mixture after expiration of this period.

Recommendations. The surface treated with the mixture should be protected from direct sun rays, precipitations and dust for 48 hours, and the product should not be used in the areas of direct solar radiation. As the product is applied in thin layers, after its application onto the surfaces to be subject to pedestrian flows and vehicles traffic it should be treated with protective facing materials, such as concrete flooring plaster or ceramic tiles.
The surfaces should be put into operation or covered with facing plates in at least 3 days after application of the mixture.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The powder composite component can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack, and the liquid component can be stored during 12 months in plastic cans placed one upon the other in three layers.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoLatexe SUPER\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar","description":"\"İzoLatexe SUPER\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar","keywords":"\"İzoLatexe SUPER\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² (for one layer) [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [39] => Array ( [id] => 39 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoLatexe UV" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 116 [product_id] => 39 [language] => en [title] => "İzoLatexe UV" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar [description] =>

Cement based, acrylic emulsion polymer, high elasticity, enriched with chemical mixtures, two-component waterproofing mixture. Composition 1 is a grey color dry mixture, Composition 2 is an acrylic based emulsion polymer.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement based, acrylic emulsion polymer, high elasticity, enriched with chemical mixtures, two-component waterproofing mixture. Composition 1 is a grey color dry mixture, Composition 2 is an acrylic based emulsion polymer. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZS 31 43498-05-2005 specifications. For potable water reservoirs, resistant to ultraviolet radiation, extra waterproofing.

Fields of Application

This insulating mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. The cement based surfaces being in contact with water should be healthy, rigid, clean, dust-free, and should have suitable dimensions. The surface should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force, and should not have small splinters. Small metal and wooden particles should be removed from the surface, cavities should be filled with Filkret repair mixture. Thoroughly soak the clean surface with water, then wait till it is half dry. Provide water saturation of the surface, otherwise it will quickly absorb the water contained in the product during application, and it will have matted appearance. So in case the work is performed at high ambient temperatures and windy conditions, the first layer of the product applied should include Component B with water content up to 10%.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour 8 kg of Component B liquid composite into clean mixing container, and gradually add 25 kg of Component A powder composite. Prepare the mixture for 3-5 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the solution becomes entirely homogeneous. Mix again in approximately 3-5 minutes during 30-second period till the solution is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Spread the prepared IzoLatexe UV mixture over the surface in two or three layers using special brush. The brush movement directions should be perpendicular to each other. The time between applications of layers may be different, depending on the environmental conditions.

Recommendations. In case the temperature of the treated surface is below +50C and above +320C, the required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in rainy or, windy weather conditions, or at excessive temperatures. The IzoLatexe UV waterproofing mixture applied at temperature of +230C achieves mechanical strength in 2 days, waterproofing features in 7 days, and final hardening in 14 days. In case the product is applied in the open air the treated surface should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and frost during 24 hours. The cement and acrylic based systems are sensitive to the ambient and surface temperatures and humidity during application and reaction. Low temperatures reduce the reaction rate, and it results in elongation of the work execution period. High temperatures increase the reaction rate, and it results in decrease of the work execution period. To save the product water content and to achieve maximum effectiveness the temperature should not drop below the specified minimum value. The thickness of one wet layer should not exceed 2 mm. It is recommended to use “Matanat A” adhesives for the surface facing. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with warm soapy water. After hardening the IzoLatexe UV product can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The powder composite component can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in cold and dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack, and the liquid component can be stored protected from freezing during 12 months in plastic cans placed one upon the other in three layers. In case the storage temperature is below 00C the composite component B may freeze.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoLatexe UV\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar","description":"\"İzoLatexe UV\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar","keywords":"\"İzoLatexe UV\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 4 bar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [40] => Array ( [id] => 40 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoLatexe UV Super" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 119 [product_id] => 40 [language] => en [title] => "İzoLatexe UV Super" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar [description] =>

Cement and acrylic based, two-component waterproofing mixture forming layer resistant to water containing salts and atmospheric gases, suitable for application both on internal and external concrete and cement based surfaces.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement and acrylic based, two-component waterproofing mixture forming layer resistant to water containing salts and atmospheric gases, suitable for application both on internal and external concrete and cement based surfaces. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZS 31 43498-05-2005 specifications.

Fields of Application

This insulating mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. The cement based surfaces being in contact with water should be healthy, rigid, clean, dust-free, and should have suitable dimensions. The surface should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force, and should not have small splinters. Small metal and wooden particles should be removed from the surface, cavities should be filled with Filkret repair mixture. Thoroughly soak the clean surface with water, then wait till it is half dry. Provide water saturation of the surface, otherwise it will quickly absorb the water contained in the product during application, and will have matted appearance. So in case the work is performed at high ambient temperatures and windy conditions the first layer of the product applied, should include Component B with water content up to 10%.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour 8 kg of Component B liquid composite into clean mixing container, and gradually add 25 kg of Component A powder composite. Prepare this mixture for 3-5 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the solution becomes entirely homogeneous. Mix again in approximately 3-5 minutes during 30-second period till the solution is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Spread the prepared IzoLatexe UV Super mixture over the surface in two or three layers using special brush. The brush movement directions should be applied perpendicular to each other. The time between applications of layers may be different, depending on the environmental conditions.

Recommendations. In case the temperature of the treated surface is below +50C and above +320C, the required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in rainy, windy weather conditions, or at excessive ambient temperatures. The IzoLatexe UV Super waterproofing mixture applied at +230C temperature achieves mechanical strength in 2 days, waterproofing features in 7 days, and final hardening in 14 days. In case of the product application onto external surfaces they should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and frost during 24 hours. The cement and acrylic based systems are sensitive to ambient and surface temperatures and humidity during application and reaction. Low temperatures reduce the reaction rate, and results in elongation of the work execution period. High temperatures increase the reaction rate, and result in decrease of the work execution period. To save the product water content and to achieve maximum effectiveness the temperatures should not drop below the specified minimum values. The thickness of one wet layer should not exceed 2 mm.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The powder composite component can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in cold and dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack, and the liquid component can be stored protected from freezing during 12 months in plastic cans placed one upon the other in three layers. In case the storage temperature is below 00C, the composite component B may freeze.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoLatexe UV Super\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar","description":"\"İzoLatexe UV Super\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar","keywords":"\"İzoLatexe UV Super\" waterproofing material (powder + liquid) 7 bar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² (for one layer) [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [41] => Array ( [id] => 41 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoKrist" surface applied capillary waterproofing system for concrete and mortar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 122 [product_id] => 41 [language] => en [title] => "İzoKrist" surface applied capillary waterproofing system for concrete and mortar [description] =>

Cement based crystallizing waterproofing plaster capable to repair cracks, suitable for application on concrete layer of newly built and old walls to prevent penetration of water.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement based crystallizing waterproofing plaster capable to repair cracks, suitable for application on concrete layer of newly built and old walls to prevent penetration of water. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZS 31 43498-05-2005 specifications.

Fields of Application

This insulating product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages


Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. The cement based surfaces being in contact with water should be healthy, rigid, clean, dust-free, and should have suitable dimensions. The surface should cleaned with water and should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force, then it should be finely perforated to increase the adhesive force. Small metal and wooden particles should be removed from the surface. In case the surface has any cavities, they should be removed with  MATON 100 repair mixture. Thoroughly soak the clean surface with water, and do not use it until it is totally dry.

Preparation of the mixture. First pour the IzoKrist powder into clean mixing container, and gradually add water for 3-5 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the solution is entirely homogeneous. Mix again in approximately 3-5 minutes during 30-second period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application. Prepare the solution in the amount required for application within 20 minutes.

Application. Spread the prepared IzoKrist mixture over the surface using brush preliminary soaked with water. While the water is not completely soaked and no crystals have formed, but the first layer is hard enough, apply the second layer. This process may take 3-5 minutes, depending on the ambient temperature. Anyway, the time between applications of the layers should not exceed 6 hours.

Recommendations. It is necessary to prevent quick drying of the surface after application of the IzoKrist product. Substances has been moisture-retaining features should not be used. The surface should be kept wet within 5-7 days by regular splashing water on it. Water reservoirs should be filled with water after application of IzoKrist product, to prolong the period of crystallization and to increase the effect of the mixture upon the deepest layers of the base surface. IzoKrist applied at +230C temperature achieves the design mechanical strength in 1 day, waterproofing features in 7 days, and final hardening in 14 days. 

Consumption

First layer consumption:  1.2  kg/m2 powder product

Second layer consumption:  1.0  kg/m2 powder product

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed on wooden racks one upon the other in three layers, and in the time of application the lower layer sacks should be used first. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoKrist\" surface applied capillary waterproofing system for concrete and mortar","description":"\"İzoKrist\" surface applied capillary waterproofing system for concrete and mortar","keywords":"\"İzoKrist\" surface applied capillary waterproofing system for concrete and mortar"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² (for one layer) [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [42] => Array ( [id] => 42 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoLex" monocomponent waterproofing material [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 125 [product_id] => 42 [language] => en [title] => "İzoLex" monocomponent waterproofing material [description] =>

Cement based, monocomponent, resistant to chemicals, waterproofing mixture, provides waterproofing to materials.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement based, monocomponent, resistant to chemicals, waterproofing mixture, provides waterproofing to materials. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZS 31 43498-05-2005 specifications. For technical water reservoirs.

Fields of Application

This insulating mixture can be applied in the following areas:

 Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. Clean the surface from any residues deteriorating adhesive force. Pay attention to ensuring rigidity of the surface. In case the surface to be used has any defects, they should be removed with MATON 100 repair mixture. Before application of the product the surface should be soaked with water, and primed with BINMADER primer to provide better results.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg powder mix into 9.5-10.0 liters of water (when using paddle roller) and mix till it is entirely homogeneous (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use slow circulation mixer). Wait 3-5 minutes to allow complete mixing of substances composing the mixture, then mix again before application.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture over the surface using paddle roller or trowel and forming a layer of equal thickness. The oval shape should be given to the corners in the product application area, and the mixture should be reinforced with mesh. In case of application of 2 layers using paddle roller, the time between application of the layers may be 5-6 hours, depending on the ambient temperature. Application of 2-3 mm thick layer is enough. This thickness can be achieved by application of one layer using a trowel. The treated surface should be protected from direct sun rays, precipitations and dust within 48 hours. As the product is applied in thin layers, after its application onto the surfaces to be subject to pedestrian flows and vehicles traffic it should be treated with protective facing materials, such as concrete flooring plaster or ceramic tiles.

Recommendations. The prepared mixture should be used within 1 hour. Do not use the mixture after expiration of this period. The surfaces should be put into operation or covered with facing plates in at least 1 week after application of the mixture.

Consumption

The IzоLех waterproofing mixture is applied in foundations, roofs, terraces in 2 mm thick layers, and in water reservoirs in 3 mm thick layer.

First layer consumption:   1.0  kg/m2  of powder product

Second layer consumption:   1.0  kg/m2 of powder product

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoLex\" monocomponent waterproofing material","description":"\"İzoLex\" monocomponent waterproofing material","keywords":"\"İzoLex\" monocomponent waterproofing material"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² (for one layer) [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [43] => Array ( [id] => 43 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoAntiasid" waterproofing material for sewerage systems [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 128 [product_id] => 43 [language] => en [title] => "İzoAntiasid" waterproofing material for sewerage systems [description] =>

Cement based, containing polymer compounds, monocomponent, waterproofing product, resistant to acids and salts, resistant to chemicals and mechanical impact, suitable for application both on internal and external concrete and cement based surfaces.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement based, containing polymer compounds, monocomponent, waterproofing product, resistant to acids and salts, resistant to chemicals and mechanical impact, suitable for application both on internal and external concrete and cement based surfaces. The product conforms to the requirements of the BS 6920 standard.

Fields of Application

This insulating mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. The surfaces to be treated with IzoAntiasid should be healthy, rigid, clean, dust-free, and durable. The surface should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force. Metal and wooden particles should be removed from the surface, the surface should be soaked with water. Then wait until it is totally dry. Facing materials quickly absorb water and obtain faded appearance, so this indicates that the surface is not saturated to the required extent, or it has quick drying features. In case of performing the works at high ambient temperatures and windy conditions the amount of water diluted to the product applied as the first layer may be increased by 10%.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour the required amount of water into the mixing container using special volumetric devices. Carefully add 25 kg of Izopol fat powder mix to 4.5-5.75 liters of water, and mix during 3-5 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer. Wait approximately 3-5 minutes, then mix again during 30-second period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Spread the prepared IzoAntiasid product using paddle roller in two or three layers. The roller movement directions should be applied perpendicular to each other. The time between applications of layers may be different, depending on the environmental conditions.

Recommendations. IzoAntiasid applied at +230C temperature obtains mechanical strength in 2 days, waterproofing features in 7 days, and final hardening in 14 days. In case of the product application onto external surfaces they should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, rain and frost during 24 hours. During application the thickness of one layer should not exceed 2 mm. Application should be conducted in 2 layers. The prepared product should be used within 30 minutes. After hardening the Izopolfat can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoAntiasid\" waterproofing material for sewerage systems","description":"\"İzoAntiasid\" waterproofing material for sewerage systems","keywords":"\"İzoAntiasid\" waterproofing material for sewerage systems"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² (for one layer) [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [44] => Array ( [id] => 44 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoBitex" bitumen based waterproofing material [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 131 [product_id] => 44 [language] => en [title] => "İzoBitex" bitumen based waterproofing material [description] =>

Based on bitumen/rubber latex emulsion, perfectly bonding, elastic after drying, layer forming, waterproofing product, resistant to damp, with no water vapour transmission feature.

[more] =>

Product description

Based on bitumen/rubber latex emulsion, perfectly bonding, elastic after drying, layer forming, waterproofing product, resistant to damp, with no water vapour transmission feature.

Fields of Application

This insulating product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. The surfaces to be treated with the product should be healthy, rigid, clean, dust-free, and should have suitable dimensions. The surface should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force, and should not have small splinters. Small metal and wooden particles should be removed from the surface, cavities should be filled with repair plaster, and oval shape should be given to the corners. Where appropriate, the IzoBitex can be applied after application of primer layer onto the surface.

Preparation of the mixture. As the IzoBitex product is monocomponent, its preparation is very simple. Take 1 kg of IzoBitex, add 6 liters of water, and mix during 3-5 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the solution is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Spread the product over the whole surface using brush or paddle roller of corresponding size with equal thickness, prevent formation of shrinkage on horizontal surfaces. Where appropriate the IzoBitex can be used as primer layer after mixing with water in the 1/6 proportion (0.02 liter of IzoBitex + 0.14 liter water, totally 0.16 liter/m²). During application consumption of the product may increase by 50% depending on the surface smoothness. After the primer hardening you can pass to the stage of application.

In case of application below the ground level (foundations or other low places) the product can be applied onto the surfaces covered with concrete just after removal of the mould. Immediately after application of the first layer the surface should be strewed with sand. After hardening the sand particles not adhered to the surface should be swept away. Then the second layer is applied, and the surface is strewed with sand again. Where appropriate, this procedure may be repeated further. In case it is required to cover the IzoBitex surface with any protective layer, the final layer should be strewed with sand before hardening. After the surface hardened the sand particles not adhered to the surface should be swept away, and only then the products based on plaster or gypsum may be applied.

Recommendations. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with warm soapy water. After hardening the IzoBitex can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions. For the short storage period the sacks can be placed on wooden racks one upon the other in three layers, and in the time of application the lower layer sacks should be used first. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoBitex\" bitumen based waterproofing material","description":"\"İzoBitex\" bitumen based waterproofing material","keywords":"\"İzoBitex\" bitumen based waterproofing material"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² (for one layer) [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [45] => Array ( [id] => 45 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA Latex" waterproofing material increasing the adhesive force and elasticity [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 134 [product_id] => 45 [language] => en [title] => "MA Latex" waterproofing material increasing the adhesive force and elasticity [description] =>

Based on emulsion polymer, ready for application product increasing mechanical strength, elasticity, adhesive force, waterproofing features, contains substances preventing formation of cracks and erosion.

[more] =>

Product description

Based on emulsion polymer, ready for application product increasing mechanical strength, elasticity, adhesive force, waterproofing features, contains substances preventing formation of cracks and erosion.

Fields of Application

This waterproofing mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. The surface should be totally free of any substances deteriorating adhesive force.

Preparation of mixture. Rinse the  MA Latex solution before use. To provide waterproofing features of the surface mix the MA Latex waterproofing solution diluted with water at proportion of 1/1 - 1/4  (MA Latex/water). To prevent formation of cracks and water soaking add the MA Latex waterproofing solution, diluted with water at proportion of 1/1- 1/4  (MA Latex/water), into tile adhesives, repair plasters, and other construction mixtures.

Application. Spread the prepared mixture according to the instruction

Consumption

On the cement based surfaces: 150 g/m2  is applied.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA Latex\" waterproofing material increasing the adhesive force and elasticity","description":"\"MA Latex\" waterproofing material increasing the adhesive force and elasticity","keywords":"\"MA Latex\" waterproofing material increasing the adhesive force and elasticity"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² (for one layer) [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [46] => Array ( [id] => 46 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoKontakt 1" fast-setting mortar to plug active water leaks (white, grey) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 137 [product_id] => 46 [language] => en [title] => "İzoKontakt 1" fast-setting mortar to plug active water leaks (white, grey) [description] =>

Ready for application plugging plaster, includes a special composition of cement and sand, to be used in water soakage areas insulation, mounting and repair works, increases adhesive force, quickly expands and hardens when mixed with water.

[more] =>

Product description

Ready for application plugging plaster, includes a special composition of cement and sand, to be used in water soakage areas insulation, mounting and repair works, increases adhesive force, quickly expands and hardens when mixed with water.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. The surfaces to be used should be healthy, rigid, clean, dust-free, and should have suitable dimensions. The surface should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force, and should not have small splinters. Edges of cavities and cracks  20 mm depth and width should be cut upright. The V-shape cavities with sharp cut corners are not allowed.

Preparation of mixture. Pour the required amount of the product into clean mixing container, and add the required amount of water during 60 seconds. Put on protective gloves and mix within maximum 30 seconds. Do not add any chemical substances to the mixture.

Attention: If the product is applied in cool weather conditions, then hot or warm water should be used. Add 1 kg of the IzoKontakt 1 product to 0.24-0.28 liter of pure water and mix (amount of water can change depending on the ambient temperature).

Application. Enlarge the areas soaked with water to the width by 20 mm. Mix the product with required amount of water in your  hands. When the mixture is warmed up, quickly apply it to cracked areas and areas where the water soaks. Put hand over the treated place and wait for 60 seconds. Carefully remove the hand after the product starts to harden. In case of larger cavities this procedure can be repeated from the cavity’s edges towards its center. Immediately after application the extra product should be removed from the cavity edges.

The product can be used for the purpose of insulation in the joints between walls and floor. Enlarge the joints to the width and depth by 20 mm minimum. Remove any wire, lead, wooden, and other small particles from the enlarged areas. Fill the joints with the IzoKontakt 1 product in appropriate manner. To fasten the metal anchor bolts and/or fastening elements to concrete surface drill a hole larger than the size of anchoring element in concrete surface using mechanical tools. Then clean the hole inside.

Before application of the IzoKontakt 1 wet the holes with required amount of water. Then fill the holes with the IzoKontakt 1 product. Quickly put metal anchor bolts and/or fastening elements to their places moving them in vertical direction, then apply products has been moisture-retaining features.

Recommendations. In case the ambient temperature in the area of IzoKontakt  1 application is below +50C and above +320C, the required temperature should be provided. The treated surface should be kept wet for 15-minute period. For dry surfaces and surfaces with high water absorption ability this period should be 30 minutes. After hardening the product can be removed by mechanical means only.

Consumption

Differs depending on dimensions of the water soaked areas.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 6 months from the manufacturing date packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions, protected from freezing. Unpacked product should be used within one week.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoKontakt 1\" fast-setting mortar to plug active water leaks (white, grey)","description":"\"İzoKontakt 1\" fast-setting mortar to plug active water leaks (white, grey)","keywords":"\"İzoKontakt 1\" fast-setting mortar to plug active water leaks (white, grey)"} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Tətbiq olunduğu səthin sahəsinin ölçülərindən asılı olaraq dəyişkəndir [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [47] => Array ( [id] => 47 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoKontakt 2" cement-based fast setting repair and anchoring mortar [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 140 [product_id] => 47 [language] => en [title] => "İzoKontakt 2" cement-based fast setting repair and anchoring mortar [description] =>

Ready to application plugging plaster has been special composition of cement and sand, used in water soakage areas insulation, mounting and repair works, increasing adhesive force, fast expanding and setting when mixed with water.

[more] =>

Product description

Ready to application plugging plaster has been special composition of cement and sand, used in water soakage areas insulation, mounting and repair works, increasing adhesive force, fast expanding and setting when mixed with water.

Fields of Application

This repair and mounting mixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. The surfaces to be used should be healthy, rigid, clean, dust-free, and should have suitable dimensions. The surface should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force, and should not have small splinters. Edges of cavities and cracks of 20 mm depth and width should be cut upright. The V-shape cavities with sharp cut corners are not allowed.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour the required amount of the product into a clean mixing container, and add the required amount of water within 3 minutes. Put on appropriate protective gloves and mix within maximum 30 seconds. Add 0.23 liter of pure water to 1 kg of the IzoKontakt 2 product and mix (amount of water may vary depending on the ambient temperature).

Application. The prepared mixture can be used in fastening operations. Holes for anchor elements should be filled with required amount of the IzoKontakt 2 product, and fastening element should be immediately placed into the hole in vertical position. Keep the IzoKontakt 2 product surface wet for 30 minutes.

Recommendations. In the cool weather conditions hot or warm water should be used. Any other chemical substances should not be added to the mixture. In case the ambient temperature in the area of IzoKontakt  2 application is below +50C and above +320C, then the required temperature should be provided. Due to quick separation of water during application, the product hardens quickly. So the treated surface should retain moisture for 15 minutes. For dry surfaces and surfaces with high water absorption ability this period should be 30 minutes.

Period of use and reaction rate of the specific cement based systems are sensitive to the ambient and surface temperatures and humidity at the moment  of application and reaction. Low temperature reduces the reaction rate and results in elongation of useful life of the prepared product in container and the operation period. High temperatures increase the reaction rate and result in decrease of above mentioned parameters. To save the product water content and to achieve maximum effectiveness the temperature should not drop below the recommended minimum values. To increase the period of the product use in cold weather conditions the packages should be brought to ready for application state at temperatures between +200C and +250C, and the mixture should be prepared using warm water only. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with warm water. After hardening the IzoKontakt 2 product can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Consumption

Differs depending on dimensions of water soaked areas.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 6 months from the manufacturing date packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions, protected from freezing. Unpacked product should be used within one week.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoKontakt 2\" cement-based fast setting repair and anchoring mortar","description":"\"İzoKontakt 2\" cement-based fast setting repair and anchoring mortar","keywords":"\"İzoKontakt 2\" cement-based fast setting repair and anchoring mortar"} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [48] => Array ( [id] => 48 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoFakt" non-toxic solvent free high build, protective epoxy resin coating (Component A + Component B) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 143 [product_id] => 48 [language] => en [title] => "İzoFakt" non-toxic solvent free high build, protective epoxy resin coating (Component A + Component B) [description] =>

Epoxide based two-component coating product enriched with chemical components, providing special protection for concrete and steel (metal) from external effects.

[more] =>

Product description

Epoxide based two-component coating product enriched with chemical components, providing special protection for concrete and steel (metal) from external effects.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surfaces. The concrete and/or metal surfaces to be treated with IzoFakt should be healthy, clean, dry and even.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour the hardening agent - Component B resin to the Component A, and mix during 3-5 minutes using 400-600 RPM mixer till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Mix again in approximately 3-5 minutes during 30-second period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Mixture preparation ratios:

Component A:   4.36 kg;

Component B:   0.64 kg.

The mixture density: 1.5 kg/liter

Application 

On concrete surfaces:The cement based surfaces of installations and constructions being in contact with water should be healthy, dry, dust-free, clean, and even. The surface should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force. Small metal and wooden particles should be removed from the surface; places of active water soakage should be filled with Izоkontakt 1 product. The IzoFakt product should be applied onto the surface at least in 28 days after laying concrete.

On metal surface: The metal surfaces should be totally free of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other substances deteriorating adhesive force. Cleaning may be performed by sandblasting (by means of coarse-grained glass sand supplied under high pressure or special caustic substances). In case it is impossible to clean the surface with glass sand, it can be cleaned using apparatus supplying hot air, pneumatic drill, and/or rotary wire scratcher. The IzoFakt product should be applied onto the surface immediately after cleaning. The surface should be protected from corrosion.

Consumption

It is recommended to apply the IzoFakt product in two layers. Consumption for each layer is approximately 0.2-0.4 kg/m2. Thickness of the powder mix of the IzoFakt product equal to 0.125-0.250 mm is enough.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cold conditions, protected from freezing.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoFakt\" non-toxic solvent free high build, protective epoxy resin coating (Component A + Component B)","description":"\"İzoFakt\" non-toxic solvent free high build, protective epoxy resin coating (Component A + Component B)","keywords":"\"İzoFakt\" non-toxic solvent free high build, protective epoxy resin coating (Component A + Component B)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [49] => Array ( [id] => 49 [status] => 1 [title] => "PENOFAS" mounting system providing heat and sound insulation [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 146 [product_id] => 49 [language] => en [title] => "PENOFAS" mounting system providing heat and sound insulation [description] =>

Mounting system for heat and sound insulation formed by facing materials applied on heat insulation panels, provided for covering building facades in individual manner, decoration, and decrease of loads on building facades.

[more] =>

Product description

Mounting system for heat and sound insulation formed by facing materials applied on heat insulation panels, provided for covering building facades in individual manner, decoration, and decrease of loads on building facades.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Operation procedure for Penofas heat insulation system fabrication on building facades

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"PENOFAS\" mounting system providing heat and sound insulation","description":"\"PENOFAS\" mounting system providing heat and sound insulation","keywords":"\"PENOFAS\" mounting system providing heat and sound insulation"} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [50] => Array ( [id] => 50 [status] => 1 [title] => "PENOFLEX 5" 25 kg adhesive for heat insulation panels [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 149 [product_id] => 50 [language] => en [title] => "PENOFLEX 5" 25 kg adhesive for heat insulation panels [description] =>

Penoflex 5 is a modified polymerization technology, cement based adhesive material applied for bonding heat insulation panels.

[more] =>

Product description

Penoflex 5 is a modified polymerization technology, cement based adhesive material applied for bonding heat insulation panels. The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please be careful to the surface to be treated with the product: it should be healthy, dry, dust-free, clean, and smooth; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force, and there should not be any splinters. In case the surface has 5-20 mm deep cracks, they should be filled with Filkret repair mixture two days before use. Temperature of the treated surface should not exceed +250C, and it should be dampened.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg powder mix into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water and mix for 3-5 minutes till it is entirely homogeneous. Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again during 30-second period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Apply the Penoflex 5 adhesive with a plaster trowel onto the back side of the heat insulation panels in single line along the edges, and in a circle in the center, then adhere the heat insulation panels onto the surface to the required level in order to provide the required uniform overall surface. After hardening of the Penoflex 5 adhesive fasten the heat insulation panels mechanically to the surface using suitable dowel nails.
Take care to prevent crust formation on the adhesive applied onto the panel surfaces when bonding heat insulation panels.

Recommendations. After bonding the of heat insulation panels with Penoflex 5 adhesive mandatory fix them to the surface with the help of suitable dowel nails. If at the time of adhesive application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm, rainy and windy weather conditions. If product is applied in the open air, the heat insulation panels should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, and rain during 24 hours after application. After the useful life expired the mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh product.

Consumption

The Penoflex 5 adhesive consumption at 3 mm thickness is 4 kg/m2. Hence, 25 kg of the Penoflex 5 adhesive can bond heat insulation panels onto the surface of approximately 6.0-6.5 m2 area.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"PENOFLEX 5\" adhesive for heat insulation panels","description":"\"PENOFLEX 5\" adhesive for heat insulation panels","keywords":"\"PENOFLEX 5\" adhesive for heat insulation panels"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [51] => Array ( [id] => 51 [status] => 1 [title] => "PENOFLEX 8" 20 kg plaster for heat insulation panels [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 152 [product_id] => 51 [language] => en [title] => "PENOFLEX 8" 20 kg plaster for heat insulation panels [description] =>

Penoflex 8 is a modified polymerization technology cement based plastering material with fiber composition applied for plastering heat insulation panels.

[more] =>

Product description

Penoflex 8 is a modified polymerization technology cement based plastering material with fiber composition applied for plastering heat insulation panels. The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS-11140 - 1993) standard “Adhesives – cement based (hydraulic conjunction), suitable for glazed, ceramic, and floor tiles”.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. It is important that before the Penoflex 8 plaster application the heat insulation panels should be bonded and fixed to the surface using dowels in normal manner. The panels should be protected from wind and other environmental impacts.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 20 kg powder mix into a clean container filled with 4.6 liters of water and mix for 3-5 minutes till it is entirely homogeneous. Give the mixture 3-5 minutes to set, mix again during 30-second period, bringing the product to conditions ready for application.

Application. Apply one layer of the Penoflex 8 plaster onto the surface of heat insulation panels bonded with the Penoflex 5 adhesive and fixed with dowels. Then apply mesh onto the first layer. Apply the second layer of the Penoflex 8 plaster onto the surface. After hardening of Penoflex 8 plaster the protective masonry paint can be applied.

Recommendations. If at the time of the adhesive application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, the required temperature should be provided. The adhesive should not be used in warm, rainy and windy weather conditions. In case the product is applied in the open air the heat insulation panels should be protected from direct sun rays, wind, and rain during 24 hours. The mixture which started to harden in no case should be diluted with water or fresh product.

Consumption

The Penoflex 8 plaster material consumption at 3mm thickness is 4.5 kg/m2. Hence, 20 kg of the Penoflex 8 plaster material can cover the surface of approximately 4.0-4.5 m2 area.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings 

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"PENOFLEX 8\" plaster for heat insulation panels","description":"\"PENOFLEX 8\" plaster for heat insulation panels","keywords":"\"PENOFLEX 8\" plaster for heat insulation panels"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [52] => Array ( [id] => 52 [status] => 1 [title] => "AĞDAĞ Astar" primer plaster primer based on gypsum and perlite (plaster) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 155 [product_id] => 52 [language] => en [title] => "AĞDAĞ Astar" primer plaster primer based on gypsum and perlite (plaster) [description] =>

Gypsum based, high quality perlite prime plaster enriched with mixtures expanding opportunities for the product application.

[more] =>

Product description

Gypsum based, high quality perlite prime plaster enriched with mixtures expanding opportunities for the product application. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 052 (TS 6433) standard.

Fields of Application

This plaster primer can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please pay attention to the treated surface: it should be healthy, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the surface has 5-6 mm deep cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret 300 or 400 repair mixtures the day before use. Herewith the surface to be treated should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour 10 kg powder mix to 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water, wait 3-4 minutes, then mix using a mixer or any suitable hand tool till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After preparation of the plaster do not add any fresh powder or water to it.

Application. Apply the prepared AGDAG primer onto the surface treated with cement or sand based plaster. Apply the primer onto the surface to form at least 3-5 mm thick layer. The AGDAG primer consumption may differ depending on the surface type. In 24 hours after the primer application the mixtures prepared using white plaster may be applied onto the surface. The AGDAG primer ready for application should be used within 100-120 minutes. The mixture should not be used after this period expired or crust formed.

Recommendations. At the time of application of the primer the ambient and surface temperature should be minimum +50C. If at the time of application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. The can and the equipment used for preparation of the mixture should always be clean. After use all hand tools and devices should be immediately cleaned with water. Dirty cans and tools reduce the useful life of the mixture.

Consumption

The AĞDAĞ primer product consumption at 3-5mm thick level of an even surface is 3-5 kg. 1 sack of AĞDAĞ primer product should be enough to cover 6-10 m2 area.

Shelf Life and Storage Method 

The product can be stored during 6 months in sealed sacks in closed areas, on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack placed one over another, provided they do not contact with the floor.

Warnings 

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"AĞDAĞ Astar\" primer plaster primer based on gypsum and perlite (plaster)","description":"\"AĞDAĞ Astar\" primer plaster primer based on gypsum and perlite (plaster)","keywords":"\"AĞDAĞ Astar\" primer plaster primer based on gypsum and perlite (plaster)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [53] => Array ( [id] => 53 [status] => 1 [title] => "AĞDAĞ Üzlük" white plaster white plaster based on gypsum and perlite (plaster) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 158 [product_id] => 53 [language] => en [title] => "AĞDAĞ Üzlük" white plaster white plaster based on gypsum and perlite (plaster) [description] =>

Gypsum based, enriched with mixtures expanding opportunities of the product application, high quality, white color, final layer white plaster mixture with high adhesive ability.

[more] =>

Product description

Gypsum based, enriched with mixtures expanding opportunities of the product application, high quality, white color, final layer white plaster mixture with high adhesive ability. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 046 (TS 370) standard.

Fields of Application

This white plaster can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please pay attention to the treated surface: it should be healthy, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions; the surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force. Before application of the white plaster the surface should be plastered with AĞDAĞ primer. Herewith the surface to be treated should first be dampened or primed with Binmader primer.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour 10 kg of AGDAG white plaster to 6.5 - 7.0 liters of water, wait 3-4 minutes, then mix using a mixer or any suitable hand tool till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After the white plaster and water are completely mixed do not add any fresh powder or water to it.

Application. Using a trowel apply the prepared AGDAG white plaster onto the wall or ceiling surface treated with AGDAG primer. The prepared mixture should be applied within 130-150 minutes. The mixture should not be used after this period expired or crust formed.

Recommendations. At the time of the white plaster application the ambient and surface temperatures should be +50C  minimum. If at the time of application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. The can and the equipment used for preparation of the mixture should always be clean. Dirty cans and tools decrease the useful life of the mixture and reduce its quality. It is recommended to clean all hand tools and devices with water immediately after use. When using a metal trowel pay special attention to avoid traces left on the surface.

Consumption 

The AĞDAĞ white plaster mixture consumption at 1mm thick layer formed on the even and smooth surface is 1 kg. Hence, 1 sack of AĞDAĞ white plaster gypsum mixture is enough to evenly cover surface of 30 m2 area.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 6 months in packaged sacks in closed areas, in dry conditions, on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack placed one over another, provided that they do not contact with the floor.

Warnings 

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"AĞDAĞ Üzlük\" white plaster white plaster based on gypsum and perlite (plaster)","description":"\"AĞDAĞ Üzlük\" white plaster white plaster based on gypsum and perlite (plaster)","keywords":"\"AĞDAĞ Üzlük\" white plaster white plaster based on gypsum and perlite (plaster)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [54] => Array ( [id] => 54 [status] => 1 [title] => "AĞDAĞ MONOMATİK" machine-applied universal plaster [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 161 [product_id] => 54 [language] => en [title] => "AĞDAĞ MONOMATİK" machine-applied universal plaster [description] =>

Gypsum based multipurpose plaster for machine application, enriched with mixtures expanding opportunities of the product application, enhancing heat and sound insulation, substituting cement and sand based plaster, as well as plaster primer and white plasters, creating even, brilliant and defect-free surface.

[more] =>

Product description

Gypsum based multipurpose plaster for machine application, enriched with mixtures expanding opportunities of the product application, enhancing heat and sound insulation, substituting cement and sand based plaster, as well as plaster primer and white plasters, creating even, brilliant and defect-free surface. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 052 (TS 6433) standard.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please pay attention to the treated surface: it should be firm and free of residues deteriorating adhesive force (dust, oil, etc). Machine equipment used for preparation of AGDAG MONOMATIK machine plaster should be clean and should be in good operating conditions. Before the AGDAG  MONOMATIK machine plaster application the surface should be thoroughly dampened. In order to make the plastered surface even  aluminum shapes should be placed under the guide screeds. In order to prevent breaking of wall corners and to make them even and regular shape it is necessary to place special angle sections in the corners. Points of connection of different materials and areas of possible movement should be provided with a special plastic lath for plaster. In case the surface is too smooth, there is no need to use handicraft methods to make it rough. To provide surface strength and prevent spalling, such surfaces should be treated with PARAKONTAKT plaster bonding coat which provides two-way bonding effect between the base surface and the applied plaster. This should be done 24 hours prior to application of the plaster. Metal surfaces should be protected from corrosion by means of treatment with anti-corrosion solution prior to application of  MONOMATIK machine plaster.

Preparation of the mixture. Place the required amount of AGDAG  MONOMATIK product into the plaster machine bin, then supply continuous flow of water into the machine. Input the data on water and AGDAG MONOMATIK  powder proportion into the machine program, then start up the machine and mix the components automatically till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Do not add to AGDAG  MONOMATIK product any additives or substances other than water.

Application. The prepared machine plaster is applied by spray gun onto the surface prepared for application (between the installed guide screed strips). The spray gun is driven by air compressor installed in the plaster machine and should form the layer at least 10 mm thick. The AGDAG  MONOMATIK consumption of the plaster machine may differ and depends on the surface type. The plaster sprayed onto the surface should be smoothed using special plaster rasp (aluminum shape), and the excessive amounts of the mixture should be removed. If the plaster pressed with a finger does not adhere to the finger, the surface may be smoothed with the rasp trowel. In approximately 1 hour the surface should be dampened with a sponge and then, in 10-15 minutes the thin top layer of the plaster should be pressed with a finger and if the finger remains clean, then the surface may be smoothed using metal rasp trowel. This will form a defect-free brilliant surface.

In case the required plaster layer thickness is below 3 mm, then one layer of AGDAG MONOMATIK machine plaster should be applied. In case the required plaster layer thickness is above 3 mm, it is necessary to apply the second layer. This second layer should be applied in approximately 2 hours after application of the first layer (if the plaster pressed with a finger does not adhere to the finger). In case the machine plaster layer applied exceeds 3 mm thickness, then irregularities may occur on the surface due to the weight of the mixture applied, and this may require application of the second layer.

Recommendations. At the time of plaster application the ambient and surface temperatures should be +50C minimum. If at the time of application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. The can and the equipment used for preparation of the mixture should always be clean. After use all hand tools and devices should be immediately cleaned with water. Dirty cans and tools reduce the useful life of the mixture. When using the metal trowel pay special attention to avoiding traces left on the surface. Provide continuous supply of water to the machine (equipment).

Consumption 

The MONOMATİK machine plaster consumption at minimum 10 mm thick layer is 9 kg/m2. 1 sack (30 kg) of MONOMATİK machine plaster is enough to cover even surface of approximately 3 m2 area.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 6 months in packaged sacks in closed areas, in dry conditions, on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack placed one over another, provided that they do not contact with the floor.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"AĞDAĞ MONOMATİK\" machine-applied universal plaster","description":"\"AĞDAĞ MONOMATİK\" machine-applied universal plaster","keywords":"\"AĞDAĞ MONOMATİK\" machine-applied universal plaster"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [55] => Array ( [id] => 55 [status] => 1 [title] => "AĞDAĞ DİREK" undercoat plaster [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 164 [product_id] => 55 [language] => en [title] => "AĞDAĞ DİREK" undercoat plaster [description] =>

Gypsum based multi-purpose plaster primer, enriched with mixtures expanding opportunities of the product application, strengthening heat and sound insulation, substituting cement and sand based plasters, as well as gypsum based plaster primer layer.

[more] =>

Product description

Gypsum based multi-purpose plaster primer, enriched with mixtures expanding opportunities of the product application, strengthening heat and sound insulation, substituting cement and sand based plasters, as well as gypsum based plaster primer layer. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 052 (TS 6433) standard (applied directly on the wall built with brick, natural stone etc.).

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please pay attention to the treated surface: it should be strong and free of residues deteriorating adhesive force (dust, oil, etc). Containers used for AGDAG DIREK plaster preparation should be clean. In order to prevent wall corner spalling in hot weather conditions, and to make them regular and neat it is necessary to place special corner sections  in the corners. In the points of different material connection and areas subject to movement plastic plaster lath should be placed. In case the surface is too smooth, there is no need to use handicraft methods to make it rough. To prevent plaster spalling and to achieve roughness, such surfaces  should be treated with PARAKONTAKT plaster bonding coat which provides two-way bonding effect between the base surface and the applied plaster. This should be done at least 24 hours prior to application of the plaster. Metal surfaces should be protected from corrosion by means of treatment with anti-corrosion solution before application of  DIREK plaster. At the time of carrying out the work the ambient and surface temperatures should be between +5°C and +30°C. AGDAG DIREK prime plaster should not be mixed with any additives or substances other than water.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour 10 kg of AGDAG DIREK powder plaster into 6.0 - 6.5 liters of water, wait 3-4 minutes, then mix using a mixer or any suitable hand tool till it is entirely homogeneous. After preparation of DIREK primer do not add any fresh plaster or water to it.

Application. Apply the prepared primer directly onto the ready wall or ceiling (not plastered with sand and cement mixture). It is allowed to apply the AGDAG DIREK primer onto the regular walls or ceilings plastered with sand and cement mixtures, but as the sand-and-cement plaster may be harmful for health, due to high repair costs it is not recommended to apply the primer onto such mixtures). Generally the DİREK primer is applied onto the surface at 0.8-1.0 cm thick layer minimum. Depending on the surface type, if required, in 24 hours after application of the AGDAG DIREK, the mixture prepared from DIREK primer and AGDAG white plaster can be applied onto the surface. To prepare such mixture it is recommended to use 85% of DIREK primer and 15 % of AGDAG white plaster in its composition. In approximately 24 hours after that the AGDAG white plaster can be prepared and applied onto the surface. The amount of 10 kg AGDAG white plaster powder mix applied at the level of 0.5 – 1.0 mm thickness form a defect-free surface. The prepared AGDAG DIREK primer mixture should be applied within 100-120 minutes, and white plaster mixture - within 130-150 minutes. The mixtures should not be used after this period expired or crust formed.

Recommendations. If at the time of AGDAG DIREK primer application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. The can and the equipment used for preparation of the mixture should always be clean. Dirty cans and tools reduce the useful life of the mixture. After use all hand tools and devices should be immediately cleaned with water.

Consumption

The AGDAG DIREK plaster primer consumption at minimum 8-10mm thick layer is 9 kg/m2. Hence, 1 sack (30 kg) of AGDAG DIREK prime plaster is enough to cover the area of approximately 3 m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 6 months in packaged sacks in closed areas, in dry conditions, on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack placed one over another, provided they do not contact with the floor.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"AĞDAĞ DİREK\" undercoat plaster","description":"\"AĞDAĞ DİREK\" undercoat plaster","keywords":"\"AĞDAĞ DİREK\" undercoat plaster"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [56] => Array ( [id] => 56 [status] => 1 [title] => "AĞDAĞ KARTONPİYER" (plaster) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 167 [product_id] => 56 [language] => en [title] => "AĞDAĞ KARTONPİYER" (plaster) [description] =>

High quality, environmentally friendly, white color, fine gypsum, obtained as the result of treatment of natural gypsum stones at the required temperatures.

[more] =>

Product description

High quality, environmentally friendly, white color, fine gypsum, obtained as the result of treatment of natural gypsum stones at the required temperatures. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 046 (TS 370) standard.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages


Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Prior to making mouldings (decorative gypsum products) and covings pay attention to the wall and ceiling surfaces: they should be checked for strength, and free of residues deteriorating adhesive force. Then, to obtain smooth and even surfaces the walls and ceilings should be treated with AGDAG primer and AGDAG white plaster.

Preparation of the mixture. Gradually pour 10 kg of Kartonpiyer product into 6.5 - 7.0 liters of water, then mix for 2-3 minutes using a mixer or any suitable hand tool.

Application. Use the prepared Kartonpiyer mixture for making decorative gypsum products (mouldings and covings), suspended gypsum ceilings and gypsum panels. The prepared mixture should be used within 8-12 minutes. The Kartonpiyer mixture should not be used after expiration of useful life.

Recommendations. If at the time of the product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. The can and the equipment used for preparation of the mixture should always be clean. Dirty cans and tools reduce the useful life of the mixture. After use all hand tools and devices should be immediately cleaned with water. It is recommended to use a rope or artificial fiber when making decorative elements. The risk of spalling of such products may be reduced by means of placing the rope or artificial fiber inside gypsum.

Consumption 

The actual consumption varies. Due to the lack of losses during application compared to other gypsums of the same weight the AGDAG Kartonpiyer is more effective as it has lower density, and allows to produce by 5% larger amounts of mouldings and covings. It provides saving of 150 kg per 100 each of 30 kg sacks of AGDAG Kartonpiyer product.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 6 months in packaged sacks in closed areas, in dry conditions, on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack placed one over another, provided that they do not contact with the floor.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"AĞDAĞ KARTONPİYER\" (plaster)","description":"\"AĞDAĞ KARTONPİYER\" (plaster)","keywords":"\"AĞDAĞ KARTONPİYER\" (plaster)"} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Hazırlanan dekorativ gips məmulatlarının ölçülərindən asılı olaraq sərfiyyat dəyişir. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [59] => Array ( [id] => 59 [status] => 1 [title] => "FASMATİK" 40 kg perlite and cement-based façade plaster (machine and hand applied) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 176 [product_id] => 59 [language] => en [title] => "FASMATİK" 40 kg perlite and cement-based façade plaster (machine and hand applied) [description] =>

Cement and perlite-based plaster that has a light filler that is highly hydraulicly polymerized, rich in admixtures increasing the useability of the product, monocomponent, that is resistant to frost, water and external impacts, that has a high resistance and elasticity, and that does not crackle after getting dry.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement and perlite-based plaster that has a light filler that is highly hydraulicly polymerized, rich in admixtures increasing the useability of the product, monocomponent, that is resistant to frost, water and external impacts, that has a high resistance and elasticity, and that does not crackle after getting dry. The product conforms to the requirements of the ГОСТ 28013-98 standard.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of surface

Residues preventing adhesion shoud be cleaned off the surface prior to plastering, and the surface should be strong. In case the surface has cracks or broken parts, they should be filled with Filkret repair mortar. Before treatment the surface should be dampened or primed with Binmader primer to achieve  a better result.

In order to make the surface to be treated with plaster flat it is necessary to place plaster profile in a plane. In order to make the wall corners even and accurate, it is required to place a profile angle in a plane with the plaster profiles. These profiles should be installed 24 hours prior to application of plaster onto the surface in order the mixture can set the profiles.

Preparation of mixture (using hand tool). Gently pour out 25 kg Fasmatik plastering and laying mixture to a container filled with 4,0 - 5.0 liters of clean water, then mix using mixer or any hand tool until it is entirely homogeneous. Mix again after 3-4 minutes.

Application (using hand tool). Apply the plaster onto the prepared surface with the thickness of 8-10 mm using trowel, then straighten it with a special straightedge (aluminium profile). The excessive amount of mixture should be excoriated. After the plaster begins to freeze, the surface should be dampened with water, and flattened with a grater. In case it is required to apply the plaster with the thickness more than 2 cm, then the plaster mixture should be applied in 2 phases. The prepared mixture should be used during 120 minutes.

Preparation of mixture (using plastering machine). Put the required amount of Fasmatik plastering and laying mixture in the hopper of plastering machine, then supply the hopper with a continuous water flow. Insert the ratio of Fasmatik machine plaster to the machine program, then start up the machine and mix them automatically in the homogeneous form.

Application (using plastering machine). The ready plaster is applied onto the surface using air compressor located over the machine with the thickness no less than 8-10 mm. The plaster sprayed onto the surface should be straightened using a special straightedge, and the excessive amount of mixture should be abraded. After the plaster begins to freeze, the surface should be dampened with water, and flattened with a grater.

Recommendations. In case the temperature of the environment where Fasmatic machine plaster mixture is used is less than +50C or more than +300C, required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in hot (more than +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. No water or dry mixture should be added to the expired mixture. After use all equipment and tools should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

12-14 kg Fasmatik machine plaster is applied for 8-10 mm thick, 1m2 surface. 25 kg of the Fasmatik machine plaster is enough to plaster the surface with the area of approximately 2 m2.

Shelf Life and storage 

The product can be stored during 12 months in unopened sacks in dry conditions,  with maximum 10 sacks laid one on another.

Warnings 

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FASMATİK\" perlite and cement-based façade plaster (machine and hand applied)","description":"\"FASMATİK\" perlite and cement-based façade plaster (machine and hand applied)","keywords":"\"FASMATİK\" perlite and cement-based façade plaster (machine and hand applied)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [61] => Array ( [id] => 61 [status] => 1 [title] => "FasNatural 100" powder mix for production of compound for decorative facing panels on building facades and decorative elements by means of moulding [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 182 [product_id] => 61 [language] => en [title] => "FasNatural 100" powder mix for production of compound for decorative facing panels on building facades and decorative elements by means of moulding [description] =>

Lime stone based, monocomponent powder product, resistant to frost, high temperatures, water and environmental impact, has high strength properties, used for production of decorative and facing stone composites.

[more] =>

Product description

Lime stone based, monocomponent powder product, resistant to frost, high temperatures, water and environmental impact, has high strength properties, used for production of decorative and facing stone composites. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZ 3143489-006-2010 technical specifications and GOST 9479-84 state standard.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Before application of the FasNatural product pay attention to the surfaces: they should be checked for strength, and free of residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the FasNatural product is applied onto the heat insulating panels, these panels should be installed on even surfaces. The FasNatural product may be applied onto the masonry walls built from limestone (construction stone), foamed concrete, and other types of stone; in this case the surface first should be treated with primer, and plastered with Binmader prior to the product use. The FasNatural may be applied directly onto the concrete surfaces.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of FasNatural product into 5.5 – 6.0 liters of clean water and wait 3 minutes, then mix using a mixer or any suitable hand tool till it is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Apply the prepared FasNatural mixture onto the building facade surface plastered with primer. Use trowel or special pumping equipment. The applied layer  thickness should be 1 cm maximum, and when applied onto CPF, EPF, and other panels installed on the building facade the thickness should be 0.5 cm. The FasNatural is applied onto the EPF and EPF panels by thin layer using trowel. Apply mesh onto the first layer before crust has been formed. Apply the second layer of the FasNatural product onto the mesh. After hardening of FasNatural product (in approximately 1 day) the grooves of required size should be cut using a special milling tool. The cut grooves should be filled with the FasNatural product using trowel, and then should be smoothed using special tool provided that the required groove depth necessary for decoration purposes is maintained. The surface should be polished after full hardening of FasNatural (in approximately 7 days). To renovate or repair the Aglay plates installed on the building facades the FasNatural mixture should be applied onto the surface by at least  3 mm thick layer using manual spray applicator gun.

The prepared mixture should be used within 80 minutes. To repair decorative stone composites the mixture should be cast in moulds. Depending on the ambient temperature within 24 hours the mould should be open and ready product should be removed from it. Besides, broken natural stone and other problems occurring on facades of ancient architectural monuments may also be restored using the FasNatural mixture.

Note: In case of lining building facade surfaces with the FasNatural mixture, if required, the surface may be polished again to the depth of 1 mm in 20 years.

Recommendations. If at the time of the FasNatural product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After expiration of useful life the mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The FasNatural powder mix consumption at 3 mm thick layer is 4.0-4.5 kg/m2, and at 5 mm thick layer is 7.0-7.5  kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FasNatural 100\" powder mix for production of compound for decorative facing panels on building facades and decorative elements by means of moulding","description":"\"FasNatural 100\" powder mix for production of compound for decorative facing panels on building facades and decorative elements by means of moulding","keywords":"\"FasNatural 100\" powder mix for production of compound for decorative facing panels on building facades and decorative elements by means of moulding"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [62] => Array ( [id] => 62 [status] => 1 [title] => "FasNatural 200" [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 185 [product_id] => 62 [language] => en [title] => "FasNatural 200" [description] =>

Lime stone based, monocomponent powder product, resistant to frost, high temperatures, water and environmental impact, has high strength properties, used for production of decorative and facing stone composites.

[more] =>

Product description

Lime stone based, monocomponent powder product, resistant to frost, high temperatures, water and environmental impact, has high strength properties, used for production of decorative and facing stone composites. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZ 3143489-006-2010 technical specifications and GOST 9479-84 state standard.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Before application of the FasNatural product pay attention to the surfaces: they should be checked for strength, and free of residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the FasNatural product is applied onto the heat insulating panels, these panels should be installed on even surfaces. The FasNatural product may be applied onto the masonry walls built from limestone (construction stone), foamed concrete, and other types of stone; in this case the surface first should be treated with primer, and plastered with Binmader prior to the product use. The FasNatural may be applied directly onto the concrete surfaces.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of FasNatural product into 5.5 – 6.0 liters of clean water and wait 3 minutes, then mix using a mixer or any suitable hand tool till it is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Apply the prepared FasNatural mixture onto the building facade surface plastered with primer. Use trowel or special pumping equipment. The applied layer  thickness should be 1 cm maximum, and when applied onto CPF, EPF, and other panels installed on the building facade the thickness should be 0.5 cm. The FasNatural is applied onto the EPF and EPF panels by thin layer using trowel. Apply mesh onto the first layer before crust has been formed. Apply the second layer of the FasNatural product onto the mesh. After hardening of FasNatural product (in approximately 1 day) the grooves of required size should be cut using a special milling tool. The cut grooves should be filled with the FasNatural product using trowel, and then should be smoothed using special tool provided that the required groove depth necessary for decoration purposes is maintained. The surface should be polished after full hardening of FasNatural (in approximately 7 days). To renovate or repair the Aglay plates installed on the building facades the FasNatural mixture should be applied onto the surface by at least  3 mm thick layer using manual spray applicator gun. The prepared mixture should be used within 80 minutes.

To repair decorative stone composites the mixture should be cast in moulds. Depending on the ambient temperature within 24 hours the mould should be open and ready product should be removed from it. Besides, broken natural stone and other problems occurring on facades of ancient architectural monuments may also be restored using the FasNatural mixture.

Note: In case of lining building facade surfaces with the FasNatural mixture, if required, the surface may be polished again to the depth of 1 mm in 20 years.

Recommendations. If at the time of the FasNatural product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After expiration of useful life the mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The FasNatural powder mix consumption at 3 mm thick layer is 4.0-4.5 kg/m2, and at 5 mm thick layer is 7.0-7.5  kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method 

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FasNatural 200\"","description":"\"FasNatural 200\"","keywords":"\"FasNatural 200\""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [63] => Array ( [id] => 63 [status] => 1 [title] => "FasNatural 500" [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 188 [product_id] => 63 [language] => en [title] => "FasNatural 500" [description] =>

Lime stone based, monocomponent powder product, resistant to frost, high temperatures, water and environmental impact, has high strength properties, used for production of decorative and facing stone composites.

[more] =>

Product description

Lime stone based, monocomponent powder product, resistant to frost, high temperatures, water and environmental impact, has high strength properties, used for production of decorative and facing stone composites. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZ 3143489-006-2010 technical specifications and GOST 9479-84 state standard. Lime stone based, monocomponent powder product, resistant to frost, high temperatures, water and environmental impact, has high strength properties, used for production of decorative and facing stone composites. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZ 3143489-006-2010 technical specifications and GOST 9479-84 state standard.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Before application of the FasNatural product pay attention to the surfaces: they should be checked for strength, and free of residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the FasNatural product is applied onto the heat insulating panels, these panels should be installed on even surfaces. The FasNatural product may be applied onto the masonry walls built from limestone (construction stone), foamed concrete, and other types of stone; in this case the surface first should be treated with primer, and plastered with Binmader prior to the product use. The FasNatural may be applied directly onto the concrete surfaces.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of FasNatural product into 5.5 – 6.0 liters of clean water and wait 3 minutes, then mix using a mixer or any suitable hand tool till it is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Apply the prepared FasNatural mixture onto the building facade surface plastered with primer. Use trowel or special pumping equipment. The applied layer  thickness should be 1 cm maximum, and when applied onto CPF, EPF, and other panels installed on the building facade the thickness should be 0.5 cm. The FasNatural is applied onto the EPF and EPF panels by thin layer using trowel. Apply mesh onto the first layer before crust has been formed. Apply the second layer of the FasNatural product onto the mesh. After hardening of FasNatural product (in approximately 1 day) the grooves of required size should be cut using a special milling tool. The cut grooves should be filled with the FasNatural product using trowel, and then should be smoothed using special tool provided that the required groove depth necessary for decoration purposes is maintained. The surface should be polished after full hardening of FasNatural (in approximately 7 days). To renovate or repair the Aglay plates installed on the building facades the FasNatural mixture should be applied onto the surface by at least  3 mm thick layer using manual spray applicator gun. The prepared mixture should be used within 80 minutes. To repair decorative stone composites the mixture should be cast in moulds. Depending on the ambient temperature within 24 hours the mould should be open and ready product should be removed from it. Besides, broken natural stone and other problems occurring on facades of ancient architectural monuments may also be restored using the FasNatural mixture.

Note: In case of lining building facade surfaces with the FasNatural mixture, if required, the surface may be polished again to the depth of 1 mm in 20 years.

Recommendations. If at the time of the FasNatural product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +500C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +500C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After expiration of useful life the mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The FasNatural powder mix consumption at 3 mm thick layer is 4.0-4.5 kg/m2, and at 5 mm thick layer is 7.0-7.5  kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method 

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FasNatural 500\"","description":"\"FasNatural 500\"","keywords":"\"FasNatural 500\""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [64] => Array ( [id] => 64 [status] => 1 [title] => "FasNatural 400" [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 191 [product_id] => 64 [language] => en [title] => "FasNatural 400" [description] =>

Lime stone based, monocomponent powder product, resistant to frost, high temperatures, water and environmental impact, has high strength properties, used for production of decorative and facing stone composites.

[more] =>

Product description

Lime stone based, monocomponent powder product, resistant to frost, high temperatures, water and environmental impact, has high strength properties, used for production of decorative and facing stone composites. The product conforms to the requirements of the TS AZ 3143489-006-2010 technical specifications and GOST 9479-84 state standard.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Before application of the FasNatural product pay attention to the surfaces: they should be checked for strength, and free of residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case the FasNatural product is applied onto the heat insulating panels, these panels should be installed on even surfaces. The FasNatural product may be applied onto the masonry walls built from limestone (construction stone), foamed concrete, and other types of stone; in this case the surface first should be treated with primer, and plastered with Binmader prior to the product use. The FasNatural may be applied directly onto the concrete surfaces.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of FasNatural product into 5.5 – 6.0 liters of clean water and wait 3 minutes, then mix using a mixer or any suitable hand tool till it is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Apply the prepared FasNatural mixture onto the building facade surface plastered with primer. Use trowel or special pumping equipment. The applied layer  thickness should be 1 cm maximum, and when applied onto CPF, EPF, and other panels installed on the building facade the thickness should be 0.5 cm. The FasNatural is applied onto the EPF and EPF panels by thin layer using trowel. Apply mesh onto the first layer before crust has been formed. Apply the second layer of the FasNatural product onto the mesh. After hardening of FasNatural product (in approximately 1 day) the grooves of required size should be cut using a special milling tool. The cut grooves should be filled with the FasNatural product using trowel, and then should be smoothed using special tool provided that the required groove depth necessary for decoration purposes is maintained. The surface should be polished after full hardening of FasNatural (in approximately 7 days). To renovate or repair the Aglay plates installed on the building facades the FasNatural mixture should be applied onto the surface by at least  3 mm thick layer using manual spray applicator gun. The prepared mixture should be used within 80 minutes. To repair decorative stone composites the mixture should be cast in moulds. Depending on the ambient temperature within 24 hours the mould should be open and ready product should be removed from it. Besides, broken natural stone and other problems occurring on facades of ancient architectural monuments may also be restored using the FasNatural mixture.

Note: In case of lining building facade surfaces with the FasNatural mixture, if required, the surface may be polished again to the depth of 1 mm in 20 years.

Recommendations. If at the time of the FasNatural product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After expiration of useful life the mixture in no case should be diluted with water or fresh powder mix. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The FasNatural powder mix consumption at 3 mm thick layer is 4.0-4.5 kg/m2, and at 5 mm thick layer is 7.0-7.5  kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method 

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FasNatural 400\"","description":"\"FasNatural 400\"","keywords":"\"FasNatural 400\""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [65] => Array ( [id] => 65 [status] => 1 [title] => "ŞPAK-F" 20 kg fine facing paste [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 194 [product_id] => 65 [language] => en [title] => "ŞPAK-F" 20 kg fine facing paste [description] =>

Lime stone based, monocomponent, white color, facing paste, designed for building facades and indoor areas.

[more] =>

Product description

Lime stone based, monocomponent, white color, facing paste, designed for building facades and indoor areas.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Before application of the FasNatural product pay attention to the surfaces: they should be checked for strength, and free of residues deteriorating adhesive force. In case

Application conditions

The surface. The surface should be clean, healthy and wet. In case the treated surface has any defects and cracks 3mm deep and deeper, they should be repaired using  MATON repair mixture at least 72 hours before the Şpak-F application. Prior to the application of the product the surface should be dampened and primed with BINMADER primer

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 20 kg of Şpak-F product into 7.5 – 8.0 liters of clean water. Prepare the mixture using trowel or slow circulation manual mixer until the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Wait 3 minutes after mixing and mix again before application.

Application. Apply the mixture  to provide equal thickness on the entire surface, using steel trowel. In case more than one layer is required the time interval between layer applications should be 2-3 hours, and the total thickness should not exceed 3 mm. The mixture prepared for application should be used within 4 hours maximum. The mixture should not be used after expiration of useful life.
After the Şpak-F is mixed with water it is mandatory required to strictly observe the waiting time, and to mix again before application. Do not add any materials (lime, cement, gypsum, etc) to the prepared mixture. The surface should be dampened during 2-3 days after application of the mixture, and should be polished after complete hardening.

Recommendations. If at the time of the Şpak-F product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be applied onto the surfaces located in warm (above +300C), and very windy, or in 24-hour frosty weather conditions. The product should not be applied after expiration of useful life. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

Depending on the surface, the mixture consumption for 1 m2 of surface is 0.8 -1.0  kg (at 1 mm thick layer).

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date, in dry conditions, on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ŞPAK-F\" 20 kg fine facing paste","description":"\"ŞPAK-F\" 20 kg fine facing paste","keywords":"\"ŞPAK-F\" 20 kg fine facing paste"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [66] => Array ( [id] => 66 [status] => 1 [title] => "F-pas Dry" fine facing paste [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 197 [product_id] => 66 [language] => en [title] => "F-pas Dry" fine facing paste [description] =>

Lime stone based, monocomponent, white color, powder product designed for creating of textured surfaces on building facades. Applied using spray applicator gun.

[more] =>

Product description

Lime stone based, monocomponent, white color, powder product designed for creating of textured surfaces on building facades. Applied using spray applicator gun.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application conditions

Preparation of the surface. The surface should be clean, healthy and wet. In case the treated surface has any defects and cracks 3mm deep or deeper, they should be repaired using MATON repair mixture at least 72 hours prior to the F-pas Dry application. Before the product application the surface should be dampened and primed with BINMADER primer

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 20 kg of F-pas Dry product into 7.5 – 8.0 liters of clean water. Prepare the mixture using a trowel or slow circulation manual mixer till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Wait 3 minutes after mixing and mix again before application.

Application. Apply the prepared paste onto the building facade surface using manual applicator gun. In 10-15 minutes provide decorative appearance to the surface texturing the set paste with a metal or plastic roller wetted with solution (to prevent the paste from adhering to the roller). The mixture prepared for application should be used within 3 hours maximum. The mixture should not be used after expiration of useful life.

After mixing the F-Pas Dry with water it is mandatory required to strictly observe the waiting time, and to mix again before application. Do not add any materials (lime, cement, gypsum, etc.) to the prepared mixture.

Recommendations. If at the time of application of the F-pas Dry product the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature should be provided. The product should not be applied onto the surfaces located in warm (above +300C), and very windy, or in 24-hour frosty weather conditions. The product should not be applied after expiration of useful life. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

Depending on the surface, the mixture consumption for 1 m2 of surface is 0.8 -1.0 kg.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date, in dry conditions on wooden racks, maximum 10 sacks per rack.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"F-pas Dry\" fine facing paste","description":"\"F-pas Dry\" fine facing paste","keywords":"\"F-pas Dry\" fine facing paste"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [67] => Array ( [id] => 67 [status] => 1 [title] => "FasMineral" 25 kg decorative facing [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 200 [product_id] => 67 [language] => en [title] => "FasMineral" 25 kg decorative facing [description] =>

Lime stone and cement based final layer facing material designed for internal and external surfaces, strengthened with light fiber, creates natural looking surfaces.

[more] =>

Product description

Lime stone and cement based final layer facing material designed for internal and external surfaces, strengthened with light fiber, creates natural looking surfaces.

Fields of Application

This product may be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the Surface. The surface should be clean, healthy and wet. At least 48 hours before application of the FasMineral product (after complete drying) the surface should be treated with the Penoflex 8 plaster to provide a 3-4 mm thick layer. Prior to application of the FasMineral the surface should mandatory be primed with Binmader primer. The FasMineral facing mixture may be applied onto the porous areas like gas concrete and absorptive surfaces after application of thin layer of the Penoflex 8 heat insulating plaster.

Preparation of the mixture. Carefully pour 25 kg of FasMineral product into 6.0 - 7.5 liters of clean and cool water, and prepare the mixture for approximately 10 minutes, using a slow circulation mixer, till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Adjust the water amount depending on the weather conditions. The mixture may be prepared using appropriate plaster machines, and may be applied onto the surface by spraying. In case of mixing in a machine pay attention to obtaining a completely homogeneous solution. Each batch of the product should be mixed with one and the same amount of water. Otherwise it may create difference in decorative elements appearance and color tone of the treated surfaces. Mix the prepared solution again in 10 minutes.

Application. Apply the prepared homogeneous mixture onto the surface using steel trowel or a suitable spray applicator gun; the excessive amounts of mixture should be removed from the surface to provide the layer of equal thickness. Decorative elements should be applied on the surface in 10 minutes maximum after application of the FasMineral facing mixture. To obtain a neatly patterned granulated surface the smoothing movements should be performed in the direction of the grains orientation . Horizontal, vertical, or circular decorative appearance may be applied with a plastic or polyurethane spattle moving in the required direction. When decorating apply as much force to the spattle as possible. All works on the same surface should be executed using the same batch of the prepared mixture. To provide timely operations on large surfaces required working conditions should be arranged for necessary number of workers, and for continuous supply of mixture to fill the grooves in the places of joints. The mixture prepared for application should be used within 2 hours, depending on weather conditions. Do not use hardened or thick mixture again and do not add water to it.

Recommendations. The product should not be applied in the conditions of direct sun rays, strong wind, high relative humidity, or heavy precipitations. During hardening the mixture applied onto the surface should be protected from freezing, rain or other sources of humidity until the end of the hardening period. If required, a shed should be used. The ambient and surface temperatures should be between +50C and +250C. In case the temperature is above +250C, the surface should be dampened for 3 hours in the morning and in the evening by spraying water over it (without pressure), to prevent excessive loss of water by the mineral facing and decrease of its strength. In normal ambient conditions the surface may be painted in 24 hours.

Consumption

The dry mixture consumption is 2.6-3.0 kg/m2. Depending on the surface shape and application conditions the consumption may vary.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FasMineral\" decorative facing","description":"\"FasMineral\" decorative facing","keywords":"\"FasMineral\" decorative facing"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [69] => Array ( [id] => 69 [status] => 1 [title] => "PARMAKET" adhesive for parquet and universal purposes (pva) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 206 [product_id] => 69 [language] => en [title] => "PARMAKET" adhesive for parquet and universal purposes (pva) [description] =>

Polyvinil acetate-based, white-colored, multipurpose gluerich in specific chemical compounds, and with a high advesive strength.

[more] =>

Product description

Polyvinil acetate-based, white-colored, multipurpose gluerich in specific chemical compounds, and with a high advesive strength. It conforms to the requirements of AZS  082-2003 standard.

Fields of Application

This glue can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of surface

The used surface should be dry and clean. The surface should be totally free of residues preventing adhesion.

Application. Mix before use. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface to be bonded. After 1-2 minutes piece together the surfaces to be bonded, and keep for one day, by pressing. To provide  astrong bonding effect, it is recommended to use it at the temperature higher than +50C. The full adhesive ability will be achieved in 24 hours.

Recommendations. If in the application of PARMAKET product, the ambient temperature is less than +50C and more than +300C,  required temperature should be provided. The glue should not be used in hot (more than +300C) weather conditions. Expired PARMAKET glue should not be used.

Consumption

The consumption is 0.5-1.2 kg m2, depending on the characteristics of wood, paper, cardboard, leather, cloth, linoleum, and other materials.

Shelf Life and  storage

The product can be stored during 12 months in unopened sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"PARMAKET\" adhesive for parquet and universal purposes (pva)","description":"\"PARMAKET\" adhesive for parquet and universal purposes (pva)","keywords":"\"PARMAKET\" adhesive for parquet and universal purposes (pva)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [70] => Array ( [id] => 70 [status] => 1 [title] => "PARMAKET ROZE" adhesive for parquet and universal purposes (pva) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 209 [product_id] => 70 [language] => en [title] => "PARMAKET ROZE" adhesive for parquet and universal purposes (pva) [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Polyvinil acetate-based, pink-colored, multipurpose glue rich in specific chemical compounds, and with a high advesive strength. It conforms to the requirements of AZS  082-2003 standard.

Fields of Application

This glue can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of surface. The used surface should be dry and clean. The surface should be totally free of residues preventing adhesion.

Application. Mix before use. Apply thin coat of the mixture onto the surface to be bonded. After 1-2 minutes piece together the surfaces to be bonded, and keep for one day, by pressing. To provide  a strong bonding effect, it is recommended to use it at the temperature higher than +50C. The full adhesive ability will be achieved in 24 hours.

Recommendations. If in the application of PARMAKET Rose product, the ambient temperature is less than +50C and more than +300C,  required temperature should be provided. The glue should not be used in hot (more than +300C) weather conditions. Expired PARMAKET Rose glue should not be used.

Consumption 

The consumption is 0.5-1.2 kg m2 depending on the characteristics of wood, paper, cardboard, leather, cloth, linoleum, and other materials.

Shelf Life and storage 

The product can be stored during 12 months in unopened sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"PARMAKET ROZE\" adhesive for parquet and universal purposes (pva)","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [71] => Array ( [id] => 71 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic gloss paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 212 [product_id] => 71 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic gloss paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Alkyd based synthetic paint with high covering capacity, resistant to subsequent yellow discoloration, wear resistant and water resistant, easily removable, provides easy application due to perfect spreadability.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface should be totally free of dust, fat, rust, paraffin, and other residues deteriorating adhesive force.

Application. Shake the product vigorously before use, then dilute the paint to make it thinner with ROKOL Synthetic Thinner in proportion of 5-10% of the paint amount. Apply the product onto the surface using suitable spray gun or a roller.

Technical specifications

Color

White, maroon, black, red, yellow, green, grey, blue

Composition of the product

Alkyd based

Dry residue

67%

Density

1.05 kg/liter

Hardening period

In 7-8 hours

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

0.85-; 2.5-, and 15.0-liter iron cans

Consumption

80 - 100 g of the product may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 3 years in closed cans in cool conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" synthetic gloss paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [72] => Array ( [id] => 72 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic matt paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 215 [product_id] => 72 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic matt paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Alkyd based synthetic paint for walls, wooden and metal surface finishing, deep color, durable, with high covering capacity.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface should be smooth and clean; free of fat, dirt, rust, and other residues.

Application. The product should be diluted to make it thinner with ROKOL synthetic thinner in the proportion of 5% of the paint amount in case a brush or a roller is used, and in proportion of 15% in case of a spray gun is used. Apply the product onto the surface in 2 layers. The layers should be applied with a 2-hour interval.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Alkyd based

Dry residue

82%

Density

1.61 kg/liter

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

0.85-; 2.5-, and 15.0-liter iron cans

Consumption

120 - 140 g of the product may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 2 years in closed cans in dry and cool conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" synthetic matt paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [73] => Array ( [id] => 73 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" antipas synthetic anti-rust paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 218 [product_id] => 73 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" antipas synthetic anti-rust paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Synthetic based anti-rust paint.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be treated with Antipas paint should be free of fat, rust, and old paints.

Preparation of the mixture. Use the Antipas paint diluted with ROKOL synthetic thinner.

Application. The paint should be thoroughly mixed before use, and should be applied onto the surface in thin layer.

Technical specifications

Color

White

Composition of the product

Synthetic based

Hardening period (at ambient temperature  +200C):

  • start
  • finish

 

In 2 hours

In 7-8 hours

Density

1.6 kg/liter

Dry residue

81%±1%

Package:

0.75-; 2.5-, and 15-liter iron cans

Consumption

1 liter of paint may cover 10-12 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 12 months in tightly closed cans in cool conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" antipas synthetic anti-rust paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [74] => Array ( [id] => 74 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" aluminum paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 221 [product_id] => 74 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" aluminum paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Synthetic based aluminum color paint, resistant to corrosion and high temperatures up to 3500C.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of surface. The surface should be totally free of dust, fat, rust, paraffin and other residues deteriorating adhesive force.

Application. Shake the paint vigorously before use. Then mix the paint so that no free pigment was left on the bottom of the can. Frequently repeat mixing procedure during application. Apply the product onto the surface using brush or roller.

Technical specifications

Color

Aluminum color

Composition of the product

Hydrocarbonate

Dry residue

37%

Density

0.95 kg/liter

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

0.85-; 2.5-, and 15.0-liter iron cans

Consumption

50-70 g of the paint may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 2 years in closed cans at room temperature.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" aluminum paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [75] => Array ( [id] => 75 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" traffic lane paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 224 [product_id] => 75 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" traffic lane paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Alkyd and chlorine rubber based paint for traffic lanes and road markings.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be covered with ROKOL traffic lane paint should be dry and clean, the surface should be free of fat, rust, and other residues deteriorating adhesive force.

Application. Dilute the paint to make it thinner with ROKOL thinner in proportion of 10-15% of the paint amount. Apply the product onto the surface using brush or spray gun. If required the paint may be diluted with ROKOL Cellulose Thinner or toluene.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Alkyd and chlorine-rubber based

Color

White, yellow

Dry residue

79%±1%

Density

  • at ambient temperature +200C

 

1.63±0.01 g/ml

Hardening period

  • start
  • finish

 

In 15 minutes

In 4 hours

Gloss (600 Gardner)

5±1

Package:

15-liter iron cans

Consumption

1 liter of the paint may cover 6-7 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 1 year in original cans, closed tight, in cool conditions. Avoid exposure to direct sun rays, keep away from fire.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" traffic lane paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [76] => Array ( [id] => 76 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic lux gloss paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 227 [product_id] => 76 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic lux gloss paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Aromatic structure, modified alkyl resin based finishing paint, does not produce acrid odors during and after application, prepared using solvents, has high gloss properties and high covering capacity.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface should be smooth and clean, the surfaces to be painted should be free of fat, dirt, rust, and all kinds of residues, and then primed with ROKOL Synthetic Anti-rust product.

Application. Dilute 1 liter of the ROKOL Lux Gloss Paint with 50-100 ml of ROKOL synthetic thinner when applied with brush or roller, or with 100-150 ml of ROKOL synthetic thinner when applied with a spray gun. The prepared paint ready for application should be applied onto the surface within 4 hours.

Technical specifications

Color

White, blue, dark blue

Composition of the product

Alkyd resin based

Dry residue

67%

Density

1.05 kg/liter

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

0.85-; 3.75-, and 15.0-liter iron cans

Consumption

125-150 g of the paint may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 1 year in closed cans in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" synthetic lux gloss paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [77] => Array ( [id] => 77 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic super matt paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 230 [product_id] => 77 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic super matt paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Alkyd based synthetic paint for walls, wood, and metal finishing, deep color, durable and washable, has high covering capacity.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be painted should be dry, dust-free, smooth and clean, plastered with paste according to the specific surface type: 1 layer of the ROKOL anti rust should be applied onto metal surfaces, while wooden surfaces should be treated with МА Tektor surface protector. In case 1 layer of BINMADER primer is applied onto the earlier painted surface before application of the fresh paint, then the product consumption will be reduced, and the adhesive force of the paint against the surface will be increased.

Application. The paint should be applied onto the surface in 2 layers. The layers should be applied with 24-hour interval using brush or roller.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Alkyd based

Dry residue

82%

Density

1.61 kg/liter

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

0.85-; 3.75-, and 15.0-liter iron cans

Consumption

120-140 g of the paint may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 3 years in closed cans in dry and cool conditions.

Warnings


Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" synthetic super matt paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [78] => Array ( [id] => 78 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" parquet varnish [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 233 [product_id] => 78 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" parquet varnish [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Urethane alkyd based monocomponent parquet varnish.

Fields of Application

This varnish can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be painted should be free of fat, rust, water, and old paints.

Application. Before application the paint should be thoroughly mixed and applied onto the surface in thin layer. It will be resistant to physical and chemical effects in 3-4 days.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Urethane alkyd based

Covering capacity

17 m2/l in one layer

Hardening period (at ambient temperature +200C):

  • start
  • finish

 

In 2-3 hours

In 7-8 hours

Consumption

0.06 liters of paint may cover 1 m2 surface in one layer.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 12 months in tightly closed cans in cool conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" parquet varnish","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [79] => Array ( [id] => 79 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" yat vernik (marine varnish) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 236 [product_id] => 79 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" yat vernik (marine varnish) [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Urethane alkyd based monocomponent colorless gloss marine varnish.

Fields of Application

This varnish can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be painted should be free of fat, rust, water, and old paints.

Application. Before application the paint should be thoroughly mixed and applied onto the surface in thin layer.

Technical specifications

Color

Transparent

Composition of the product

Urethane alkyd based

Density

  • at ambient temperature +200C

 

0.92 g/ml

Hardening period (at ambient temperature +200C):

  • start
  • finish

 

In 2 hours

In 7-8 hours

Covering capacity

17 m2/l in one layer

Dry residue

58%±1%

Package:

0.75-; 2.5-, and 15-liter iron cans

Consumption

0.06 liter of paint may cover 1 m2 surface in one layer.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 12 months in tightly closed cans in cool conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" yat vernik (marine varnish)","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [80] => Array ( [id] => 80 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic thinner [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 239 [product_id] => 80 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" synthetic thinner [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Synthetic thinner designed for cleaning painting equipment and diluting synthetic based products.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Application. Synthetic based paints, varnishes and primers should be applied using brush or roller after dilution with ROKOL synthetic thinner.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Synthetic based

Ignition point

390C and higher

Package:

0.5-; 1.0-; 3.0-; 4.0-, and 15.0-liter iron cans

Consumption

Consumption may differ depending on the thickness of the product to be prepared.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 3 years in tightly closed cans in cool closed room, protected from direct sun rays.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" synthetic thinner","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [81] => Array ( [id] => 81 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" plus paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 242 [product_id] => 81 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" plus paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Acrylic heteropolymer based pain, with high adhesive force, does not form cracks, washable, has high covering capacity and decorative appearance, environmental friendly, odorless, designed for indoor surfaces.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be painted should be free of fat, rust, paraffin and other similar residues deteriorating adhesive force. The surface should be primed with BINMADER primer.

Application. To apply the first layer dilute the paint to make it thinner with water in proportion of 20% of the paint amount, and to apply the second layer – in proportion of 15% of the paint amount. Apply the paint onto the surface using brush or roller. When applying the paint the ambient temperature should above +50C, and the relative air humidity should be below 80%.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Acrylic heteropolymer based

Dry residue

69%

Density

1,64 kg/liter

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

3.5; 10.0, and 25.0 kg iron cans

Consumption

125-150 g of the paint may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 2 years in closed cans in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" plus paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [82] => Array ( [id] => 82 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" sil silicone paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 245 [product_id] => 82 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" sil silicone paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Acrylic heteropolymer based paint, contains silicone compounds, has high adhesive force, easily removable, creates protective and decorative deep color wall coating for indoor surfaces.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be painted should be dry, dust-free, clean and smooth. Before application of ROKOL SIL one layer of the F-Pas facing paste should be applied onto the freshly painted surfaces. It is recommended to apply one layer of the BINMADER primer before application of ROKOL SIL onto the old contaminated or decoratively modified surfaces painted earlier with water based or solvent based paints.

Application. Two layers of the paint should be applied in 24 hours after application of the primer. To apply the first layer, dilute the paint with water in proportion of 35% of the paint amount, and to apply the second layer – in proportion of 15-20% of the paint amount. The layers should be applied in at least 6-hour interval. Apply the paint onto the surface using brush or roller. When applying the paint the ambient temperature should be above +50C, and the relative air humidity should be below 80%.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Acrylic heteropolymer based

Dry residue

68%

Density

1.60 kg/liter

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

3.5; 10.0, and 25.0 kg iron cans

Consumption

90-130 g of the paint may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 2 years in closed cans at room temperature.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" sil silicone paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [83] => Array ( [id] => 83 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" plastic paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 248 [product_id] => 83 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" plastic paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Environmentally friendly odorless paint for indoor surfaces, contains acrylic heteropolymer emulsion, does not form cracks and does not peel off.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be painted should be dry, dust-free, clean and smooth. The surface should be primes with Binmader primer.

Application. The paint should be applied onto the surface using brush or roller, in two layers: to apply the first layer dilute the paint with water in proportion up to 30% of the paint amount, and to apply the second layer – in proportion up to 20% of the paint amount. During application the ambient temperature should be above +50C, and the relative air humidity should be below 80%.

Technical specifications

Color

White, blue, green, beige

Composition of the product

Acrylic heteropolymer based

Dry residue

72%

Density

1.74 kg/liter

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

3.5; 10.0, and 25.0 kg iron cans

Consumption

125-150 g of the paint may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 2 years in closed cans in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" plastic paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [84] => Array ( [id] => 84 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" masonry acrylic paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 251 [product_id] => 84 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" masonry acrylic paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Acrylic heteropolymer emulsion based high quality paint for external surfaces.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. Prior to application of the ROKOL Acrylic paint the surface should be cleaned and totally free of fat, dust, sand and other residues deteriorating adhesive force. On the fresh plastered surfaces the paint may be applied in 21 days after plastering (at ambient temperature +20°C). The ROKOL Acrylic wall paint should be applied after the surface is primed with Binmader primer.

Application. The paint should be applied onto the surface in 2 layers: to apply the first layer, dilute the paint with water in proportion up to a half of the paint amount, and to apply the second layer – in proportion up to 1/4 of the paint amount. The layers should be applied in 1 hour interval. In the time of application the ambient temperature should be above +50C, and the relative air humidity should be below 80%.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Acrylic heteropolymer based

Color

White

Dry residue

63%±1%

Density

1.55 g/ml

Hardening period (at ambient temperature +200C)

  • start
  • finish

 

In 1-2 hours

In 24 hours

Gloss (600 Gardner)

7±1

Package:

2.5-; 7.5-, and 15-liter plastic cans

Consumption

1 liter of the paint may cover 11-13 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 2 year in original closed cans in the areas protected from direct sun rays and frost, at ambient temperatures between 0°C and +35°C.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" masonry acrylic paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [85] => Array ( [id] => 85 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" texture paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 254 [product_id] => 85 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" texture paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Acrylic heteropolymer based silicone masonry paint, has deep color, high covering capacity, resistant to moisture and water, shows long-term resistance to subsequent yellow discoloration.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be painted should be totally free of fat, dust, paraffin, and other residues deteriorating adhesive force. All waterproofing procedures in the building should be carried out  earlier.

Application. The paint should be applied onto the fresh plastered surface using brush or roller at least in 28 days after plastering.

Technical specifications

Color

White

Composition of the product

Acrylic heteropolymer based

Dry residue

82%

Density

1.81 kg/liter

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

25.0 kg iron cans

Consumption

1.0-1.5 kg of paint may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 3 year in closed cans in dry conditions, at ambient temperatures between +50C and +35°C.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" texture paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [86] => Array ( [id] => 86 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" sutut waterproof paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 257 [product_id] => 86 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" sutut waterproof paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Acrylic heteropolymer based paint, forms elastic layer on the treated surfaces after mixing with water.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be painted should be free of dust, fat, paraffin and other residues. First the paint should be mixed with water in proportion 1:1 to prime the dry and clean surface in one layer.

Application. Two layers of the ROKOL SUTUT paint without adding water should be applied onto the primed surface. The layers should be applied perpendicular to each other. The layers should be applied at least in 24-hour interval. The paint should be applied using brush or roller.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Acrylic heteropolymer based

Dry residue

67%

Density

1.39 kg/liter

Full cure time

In 24 hours

Package:

3.5; 10.0, and 25.0 kg iron cans

Consumption

1.0-2.0 kg of paint may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 2 years in closed cans in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" sutut waterproof paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [87] => Array ( [id] => 87 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" silicone paint [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 260 [product_id] => 87 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" silicone paint [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Acrylic heteropolymer silicone emulsion based high quality durable paint for external surfaces.

Fields of Application

This paint can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. Prior to the ROKOL Silicone paint application, the bubbled, loose and crumbly coatings should be scraped; the surface should be free of fat, rust and other residues deteriorating adhesive force. Before application the surface should be treated with silicone primer. If required, cracks and holes in the surface should be repaired with F-Pas facing paste.

Application. The paint should be applied onto the surface using brush or roller in 2 layers: to apply the first layer dilute 4 parts of the paint with 2 parts of water, and to apply the second layer – with 1 part of water. The layers should be applied in 1 hour interval. During application the ambient temperature should be above +50C, and the relative air humidity should be below 80%. The ROKOL Silicone paint can be applied onto the freshly plastered surfaces in 21 days after plastering.

Technical specifications

Composition of the product

Acrylic heteropolymer silicone emulsion based

Color

White

Dry residue

64%±1%

Density

  • (at ambient  temperature +200C)

 

1.56±0.01 g/ml

Hardening period (at ambient temperature +200C)

  • start
  • finish

 

In 1-2 hours

In 24 hours

Gloss (600 Gardner)

7±1

Package:

10 and 25 kg plastic cans

Consumption

150-175 g of the paint may cover 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 2 years in original closed cans in the areas protected from direct sun rays and frost, at ambient temperatures between 0°C and +35°C.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" silicone paint","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [88] => Array ( [id] => 88 [status] => 1 [title] => "F-pas" 20 kg facing paste [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 263 [product_id] => 88 [language] => en [title] => "F-pas" 20 kg facing paste [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Acrylic heteropolymer emulsion based paste for internal and external surfaces and building facades.

Fields of Application

This facing paste can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Preparation of the surface. The surface to be treated should be firm, dry and clean. The surface should be free of residues deteriorating adhesive force, it should be checked for strength. Prior to application of the product, the surface should be dampened or should be primed with Binmader primer to achieve better results.

Application. The product should applied without adding water because it is produced ready for application. The product can be applied onto the surface using trowel, any paste spreading tool like applicator, or spray gun. The layers should be applied at least in 3-4-hour intervals, and to obtain smooth surface 2-3 layers should be applied. The paint should be applied using brush or roller. During application the surface temperature should be above or equal to +50C.

Recommendations. At the time of application of the F-pas facing paste the surface temperature should be within +50C - +300C. In case of outdoor application the surface should be protected from direct sun rays, rain, wind and frost for 24 hours.

To fill deep cavities and cracks on the building facades it is recommended to add 250 g of white cement and approximately 100 g of water to 1 kg of F-Pas facing paste, and to apply onto the surface after thorough mixing. This procedure will  form stronger surface.

Technical specifications

Color

White

Operating temperatures

+50 C - +300 C

Useful life

2 hours

Hardening period

3-5 hours

Package:

10 and 25 kg plastic buckets

Consumption

Depending on surface conditions 1 kg of F-Pas facing paste may cover 0.8-1.2 m²  surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored 12 months packed in closed buckets in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"F-pas\" facing paste","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [90] => Array ( [id] => 90 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" sellülozik dolğu vernik [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 269 [product_id] => 90 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" sellülozik dolğu vernik [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" sellülozik dolğu vernik","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [91] => Array ( [id] => 91 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" sellülozik tiner [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 272 [product_id] => 91 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" sellülozik tiner [description] => [more] =>

Məhsul haqqında

Yüksək keyfiyyətli solventlərdən istehsal edilrniş sellülozik tinerdir. ROKOL Sellülozik Tiner lakların quruma, parıltılıq, yayılma və s. xüsüsiyyətlərinə müsbət şəkiidə təsir edir.

İstifadə sahələri

Bu sellülozik tinerdən:

Üstünlükləri

İstifadə qaydaları

Səthin hazırlanması. Tətbiq ediləcəyi səthlər yağ, pas və köhnə boyalardan təmizlənməlidir.

Tətbiqi. Nitrosellüloz əsaslı dolğu, parlaq verniklərin, həmçinin sənaye boyalarının incəldilməsində istifadə olunur. İstifadədən sonra qabın qapağı möhkəm şəkildə bağlanmalıdır.

Texniki göstəricilər

Rəngi

şəffaf

Tərkibi

sellülozik solvent əsaslı

Qablaşdırma

0,85; 3,0 və 15 litrlik dəmir qablarda

Texniki göstəricilər

Rəngi

şəffaf

Tərkibi

sellülozik solvent əsaslı

Qablaşdırma

0,85; 3,0 və 15 litrlik dəmir qablarda

Sərfiyyat

Sərfiyyatı dəyişkəndir.

Saxlama müddəti və qaydası

Kip və ağzı bağlı qabda, sərin yerdə 3 il saxtanıla bilər.

Xəbərdarlıqlar

Zəmanət və texniki dəstək

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" sellülozik tiner","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [92] => Array ( [id] => 92 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoFaslastik" qoruyucu fasad boyası [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 275 [product_id] => 92 [language] => en [title] => "İzoFaslastik" qoruyucu fasad boyası [description] => [more] =>

İstifadə sahələri

İzoFaslastik 100%-li akril polimeri əsaslı, dəmir-beton və suvaqlı səthlər üçün yaradılmış, birkomponentli, yüksək qoruyucu xüsusiyyətlərə malik elastomerli xarici səth boyasıdır. Dəmir-beton konstruksiyaları və birləşmələri donvurmadan, karbonatlaşmadan və müxtəlif duzların təsirlərindən qoruyan xüsüsi fasad boyasıdır. TŞ AZS 31 43498-05-2005 standartına uyğundur.

Texniki xüsusiyyətləri

Bu boyadan:

Üstünlükləri

İstifadə qaydaları

Səthin hazırlanması. Məhsulun çəkiləcəyi səthin sağlam, quru, davamlı, tozsuz, təmiz və eyni zamanda düzgün olmasına diqqət edilməlidir. Səth yapışmanı zəiflədən hər növ yağ, pas və parafin qalıqlarından tamamilə təmizlənməli və səthdə sallanan hissəciklər olmamalıdır. Hamar olmayan səthlərdə müvafiq Filkret təmir qarışığı və ya standartlara uyğun istehsal edilmiş digər bu tipli təmir qarışığından istifadə olunmalıdır. Yeni suvaqların və dəmir-beton səthlərin üzərində tətbiq olunduqda 28 günlük sərtləşmə müddətinin bitməsini gözləmək lazımdır.

Qarışığın hazırlanması. İzoFaslastik izolyasiya boyasını istifadə etməzdən əvvəl 400-600 dövr/dəqiqəlik qarışdırıcı qurğu vasitəsilə qarışdırın. İzoFaslastik məhsuluna qətiyyən su əlavə etməyin. Astar qismində səthə 2 qat BİNMADER astar və ya standartlara uyğun istehsal edilmiş digər bu tipli məhsul çəkin, sonra isə İzoFaslastik və ya standartlara uyğun istehsal edilmiş bu tipli digər məhsulla müvafiq rəngsaz malası vasitəsilə astarlanmış səthə tətbiq edin. İzoFaslastik məhsulunun ağ və ya boz rəngini digər rənglərlə 1/1-1/2 və 1/3 nisbətlərində qarışdırmaqla müxtəlif rəng növləri əldə edilə bilər.

Tətbiqi. BİNMADER astar  və ya standartlara uyğun istehsal olunmuş digər bu tipli məhsul çəkilmiş səthlərə 4-6 saatdan sonra İzoFaslastik müvafiq vərdənə və püskürtmə qurğusu vasitəsilə 2 mərhələdə çəkilir. 1-ci mərhələ (2 qat vurulur) bitəndən 5-6 saat sonra 2-ci mərhələ (2 qat vurulur) başlanır və beləliklə, prosses sona çatmış olur.

Tövsiyələr. İstifadə olunan mühitin və səthin temperaturu +50C–dən aşağı və ya +300C-dən yuxarı olarsa, müvafiq temperatur təmin olunmalıdır. Tətbiq olunan məhsul ilk sutka ərzində yağışdan və donvurmadan qorunmalıdır. İzoFaslastik lazım olan hallarda möhkəm və köhnə boyalı səthlər üzərinə çəkilə bilər. Belə hallarda mövcud boyanın yapışma qabiliyyəti yoxlanılmalıdır. Qatlar arasındakı quruma müddətinə diqqət edilməlidir. Məhsul istifadə edilib qurtardıqdan sonra alət və ləvazimatlar su ilə təmizlənməlidir.

Texniki göstəricilər

Rəngi

ağ; boz

İstifadə temperaturu

+50 C - +300 C

Maddənin qatılıq dərəcəsi

65 %

Həcm kütləsi

1,2 kq/litr

Dartılmaya davamlılığı:

  • 45 aydan sonra

 

2 N/mm2

İstifadə müddəti

3 saat

Uzanma, maksimal dartınma

145%

Qopma dartınması

155%

Qablaşdırma

20 kq-lıq plastik qablarda

Sərfiyyat

Saxlama müddəti və qaydası

Açılmamış qablarda quru şəraitdə 24 ay saxlanıla bilər.

Xəbərdarlıqlar

Zəmanət və texniki dəstək

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoFaslastik\" qoruyucu fasad boyası","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [93] => Array ( [id] => 93 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" sellülozik parlaq vernik [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 278 [product_id] => 93 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" sellülozik parlaq vernik [description] => [more] =>

Məhsul haqqında

Nitrosellüloz əsaslı,  tez quruyan, parlaq, son qat mebel lakıdır.

İstifadə sahələri

Bu lakdan:

Üstünlükləri

İstifadə qaydaları

Səthin hazırlanması. Boyanın tətbiq ediləcəyi səthlər yağ, pas, su və köhnə boyalardan təmizlənməlidir.

Qarışığın hazırlanması. İstifadədən əvvəl ROKOL Sellülozik Tinerlə incəldin (durulaşdırın).

Tətbiqi. İstifadədən əvvəl boya yaxşıca qarışdırılmalı və nazik qat şəklində çəkilməlidir

Texniki göstəricilər

Rəngi

şəffaf

Tərkibi

nitrosellüloz əsaslı

Sıxlığı

  • +200C temperaturda

 

0,93 kq/l

Quruma  müddəti:

  • ilk
  • son

 

20-25  dəqiqədən sonra

2,0-2,5  saatdan sonra

Örtmə qabiliyyəti

4-5 m2/l

Qatı maddə miqdarı

30%±2%

Qablaşdırma

0,85;   2,5  və 12 kq-lıq dəmir qablarda

Sərfiyyat

Tək qatda 8-10 m2/l.

Saxlama müddəti və qaydası

Kip və ağzı bağlı qabda, sərin yerdə 2 il saxtanıla bilər.

Xəbərdarlıqlar

Zəmanət və  texniki dəstək

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" sellülozik parlaq vernik","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [94] => Array ( [id] => 94 [status] => 1 [title] => "FasMazaik" decorative facade coatings based mineral [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 281 [product_id] => 94 [language] => en [title] => "FasMazaik" decorative facade coatings based mineral [description] =>

Decorative mosaic plaster containing specific substances, used on internal and external surfaces.

[more] =>

Product description

Decorative mosaic plaster containing specific substances, used on internal and external surfaces.

Fields of Application

This facade coating can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of surface. The surface should be totally free of oil, rust, paraffin, and other residues preventing adhesion. In case the surface has cracks or pores, it should be repaired with F-Pas facing paste. The surface should first be primed with Binmader primer, and decorative plaster should be applied to the surface after the primer gets dry.

Preparation of mixture. Thoroughly mix the decorative plaster using poor circulation mixer. To regulate the applied product density add water in small amounts (at most up to 1% of the product).

Application. Apply the decorative plaster using stainless steel trowel in the same direction provided that there is no air gap, and then polish.

Consumption
1 m2 surface can be plastered with 3 kg decorative plaster in 2 mm thickness.

Shelf Life and storage
The product can be stored during 24 months in unopened sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FasMazaik\" decorative facade coatings based mineral","description":"\"FasMazaik\" decorative facade coatings based mineral","keywords":"\"FasMazaik\" decorative facade coatings based mineral"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [95] => Array ( [id] => 95 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" 100 binder primer ready to use [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 284 [product_id] => 95 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" 100 binder primer ready to use [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Acrylic based ready for application liquid product, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.

Fields of Application

This primer can be applied in the following areas:

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please pay attention to the treated surface: it should be healthy, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions. The surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force.

Application. Shake the BINMADER 200 product before use, then apply onto the surface using paddle roller or brush. The material hardening period is 45-60 minutes (do not conduct any works on the surface until it hardens). In case of performing work on surfaces with high water absorption properties, such as gypsum, apply 2 layers of the material.

Recommendations. If at the time of the BINMADER 200  primer application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The BINMADER 200 bonding primer consumption is 120 g/m2. To be used as follows:

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months in original sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" 100 binder primer ready to use","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [96] => Array ( [id] => 96 [status] => 1 [title] => "ROKOL" 200 binder primer [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 287 [product_id] => 96 [language] => en [title] => "ROKOL" 200 binder primer [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Acrylic based ready for application liquid product, enriched with mixtures enhancing potential of the product usage.

Fields of Application

This primer can be applied in the following areas:

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please pay attention to the treated surface: it should be healthy, dry, clean, and should have required dimensions. The surface should be totally free of fat and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force.

Application. Shake the BINMADER 200 product before use, then apply onto the surface using paddle roller or brush. The material hardening period is 45-60 minutes (do not conduct any works on the surface until it hardens). In case of performing work on surfaces with high water absorption properties, such as gypsum, apply 2 layers of the material.

Recommendations. If at the time of the BINMADER 200  primer application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

The BINMADER 200 bonding primer consumption is 120 g/m2. To be used as follows:

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months in original sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"ROKOL\" 200 binder primer","description":"\"ROKOL\" 200 binder primer","keywords":"\"ROKOL\" 200 binder primer"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [97] => Array ( [id] => 97 [status] => 1 [title] => "PARAKONTAKT" gypsum plaster bonding coat for concrete walls and ceilings [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 290 [product_id] => 97 [language] => en [title] => "PARAKONTAKT" gypsum plaster bonding coat for concrete walls and ceilings [description] =>

"PARAKONTAKT" gypsum plaster bonding coat for concrete walls and ceilings

[more] =>

Product description

A modified polymerization technology, resin based primer increasing hardiness and adhesive strength between the surfaces and cement, especially gypsum based plaster applied onto even concrete surfaces, walls and ceilings.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Please pay attention to the treated surface: it should be healthy, dry, hard, dust-free, clean, and should have required dimensions. The surface should be totally free of fat, rust and paraffin residues deteriorating adhesive force; there should not be any small defects.

Preparation of the mixture. Pour 10 kg of PARAKONTAKT product into a designated bucket, and gradually add water  in the proportion of up to 1% of the product weight. Prepare this mixture for 3-5 minutes using a 400-600 RPM mixer till the solution is entirely homogeneous.

Application. Apply the mixed and ready to application product onto the preliminary prepared surface using paddle roller. It is necessary to test the absorption ability of the surface prior to application of the PARAKONTAKT product onto the surface. The cement based and especially gypsum based plasters can be applied onto the surface treated with the PARAKONTAKT product in 24 hours after its hardening.

Recommendations. If at the time of the PARAKONTAKT product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used on external surfaces. It is important to keep the primer in clean conditions both during application, and after application. The PARAKONTAKT product is not suitable for application in the areas of high humidity (i.e. bath houses, saunas, swimming pools, etc). During application the product should be frequently mixed.

Consumption 

The PARAKONTAKT product consumption is 150-250 g/m2, depending on water absorption properties and smoothness of the surface. The consumption of the product mixed with water is 210-375 g/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"PARAKONTAKT\" gypsum plaster bonding coat for concrete walls and ceilings","description":"\"PARAKONTAKT\" gypsum plaster bonding coat for concrete walls and ceilings","keywords":"\"PARAKONTAKT\" gypsum plaster bonding coat for concrete walls and ceilings"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [98] => Array ( [id] => 98 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA Sem" ideal cement cleaner [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 293 [product_id] => 98 [language] => en [title] => "MA Sem" ideal cement cleaner [description] =>

Product containing surface-active substances, easily cleaning cement-based residues.

[more] =>

Product description

Product containing surface-active substances, easily cleaning cement-based residues.

Fields of Application

This cleaner can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of mixture. Depending on the amount of residues on the tiles, the product can be mixed with water at 1/5 or 1/10 ratios.

Application. The cleaning work using  МА Sem  mixed with water at the above ratios can be conducted in two methods:

Manual cleaning. Spread the МА Sem product to approximately 2 m2 part of the area to be cleaned with a brush. Wait for 2-3 minutes, then clean it rubbing with rag. Fill the dirty water formed on the ground to bucket using sponge. Wash the rag and sponge with clean water. Clean the whole surface on the same way. After completion of the cleaning work, reuse the MA Sem product prepared by being mixed with less water in the areas where dirt remains. Then rub the whole surface damping it with large amount of water, and wait until it is totally dry. To remove hard and heavy stains, use the МА Sem keep the product on the surface for a longer period of time without mixing it with water.

Dry cleaning and cleaning with vacuum equipment. Spread the МА Sem product to approximately 4 m2 part of the area to be cleaned. Wait for 2-3 minutes, then put strong washing rag in the lower part and start cleaning using the equipment. Collect the dirty water formed on the ground using the vacuum equipment. Clean the whole surface on the same way. After completion of the cleaning work, reuse the MA Sem product prepared by being mixed with less water in the areas where dirt remains. Dampen the whole surface with large amount of water, then remove the collected water using the vacuum equipment and wait it to dry.

Recommendations. If in the application of the МА Sem  product the environmental temperature is less than +50C and more than +300C,  required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in hot (more than +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all appliances and tools should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

1 liter of product allows cleaning of 100 m2 surface (at 1/5 product/water ratio).

Shelf Life and storage

The product can be stored during 12 months in unopened sacks in dry conditions

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA Sem\" ideal cement cleaner","description":"\"MA Sem\" ideal cement cleaner","keywords":"\"MA Sem\" ideal cement cleaner"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [99] => Array ( [id] => 99 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA Tem" super spot cleaner [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 296 [product_id] => 99 [language] => en [title] => "MA Tem" super spot cleaner [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Product containing specific chemical substances, used for cleaning of different stains that are hard to remove.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Instruction procedures

Preparation of mixture. Depending on the kind of stain the product can be mixed with water at 1/5 or 1/10 ratios.

Application. The cleaning work using  МА Tem  mixed with water at the above ratios can be conducted in two methods:

Manual cleaning: Spread the МА Sem product to approximately 2 m2 part of the area to be cleaned with a brush. Wait for 2-3 minutes, then clean it rubbing with rag. Fill the dirty water formed on the ground to bucket using sponge. Wash the rag and sponge with clean water. Clean the whole surface on the same way. After completion of the cleaning work, reuse the MA Sem product prepared by being mixed with less water in the areas where dirt remains. Then rub the whole surface damping it with large amount of water, and wait until it is totally dry. To remove hard and heavy stains, use the МА Sem keep the product on the surface for a longer period of time without mixing it with water.

Dry cleaning and cleaning with vacuum equipment:  Spread the МА Sem product to approximately 4 m2 part of the area to be cleaned. Wait for 2-3 minutes, then put strong washing rag in the lower part and start cleaning using the equipment. Collect the dirty water formed on the ground using the vacuum equipment. Clean the whole surface on the same way. After completion of the cleaning work, reuse the MA Sem product prepared by being mixed with less water in the areas where dirt remains. Dampen the whole surface with large amount of water, then remove the collected water using the vacuum equipment and wait it to dry.

Recommendations. If in the application of the МА Sem  product, the environmental temperature is less than +50C and more than +300C,  required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in hot (more than +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all appliances and tools should be cleaned with water.

Consumption 

3-5 liter of the cleaner allows cleaning of 100 m2 surface (without mixing with water).

Shelf Life and storage

The product can be stored during 12 months in unopened sacks in dry conditions

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA Tem\" super spot cleaner","description":"\"MA Tem\" super spot cleaner","keywords":"\"MA Tem\" super spot cleaner"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [100] => Array ( [id] => 100 [status] => 1 [title] => "PROMATEKTOR" surface protector [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 299 [product_id] => 100 [language] => en [title] => "PROMATEKTOR" surface protector [description] =>

It is a microlevel surface protector that does not form a crust, penetrating the surface it is used, that prevents incrustation, and that does not interfere with breathing.

[more] =>

Product description

It is a microlevel surface protector that does not form a crust, penetrating the surface it is used, that prevents incrustation, and that does not interfere with breathing.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of surface

The surface should be cleaned with МА Sem or MA Tem products and totally dry.

Application. Apply the PROMATEKTOR product using brush or sponge in the same direction and equal amount for all sides of surface, and wait drying. Apply 2 layers onto external areas. The layers should be applied with 24-hour interval. The surfaces treated with the product can be put into operation in 24 hours. Apply the product onto vertical surfaces by means of spraying. Repeat this procedure 2-3 times depending on state of surfaces to be treated with the product (incrustation, occurence of algae, etc.).

Recommendations. If in the application of the МА Sem product the environmental temperature is less than +50C and more than +300C,  required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in hot (more than +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all appliances and tools should be cleaned with water.

Consumption

10-15 liters of the surface protector should be applied onto 100 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and storage 

The product can be stored during 12 months in unopened sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"PROMATEKTOR\" surface protector","description":"\"PROMATEKTOR\" surface protector","keywords":"\"PROMATEKTOR\" surface protector"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [101] => Array ( [id] => 101 [status] => 1 [title] => "STALTOP 500" cement based hardener with quartz additive for concrete surfaces [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 302 [product_id] => 101 [language] => en [title] => "STALTOP 500" cement based hardener with quartz additive for concrete surfaces [description] =>

Cement based powder mix with quartz additive, containing modified polymers. Ready for application concrete surface hardener to be applied  as powder onto freshly laid concrete surfaces to be used for heavy vehicle and motor truck traffic.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement based powder mix with quartz additive, containing modified polymers. Ready for application concrete surface hardener to be applied  as powder onto freshly laid concrete surfaces to be used for heavy vehicle and motor truck traffic. The product conforms to the requirements of AZS 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993), GOST 10181-76, GOST 28013-98, and TS AZS 31 43498-05-2005 standards.

Fields of Application

This surface hardener may be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. At least one day before laying  fresh concrete onto existing concrete surface the latter should be thoroughly saturated with water, however there should be no free water left on the surface. STALTOP 500 should be strewn onto the freshly-laid concrete surface. Prior to application the floor formwork should be arranged in square sections, cracks control intervals should be defined, and concrete should be laid in accordance with these rules. To prevent formation of cracks in the concrete, the intervening gaps approximately 1 cm wide should be left open along the perimeter of the provided square sections, and foam plastic panels should be places in these gaps. After the concrete is load the foam plastic panels should be removed, and the gaps should be filled with Fugaton elastic joint filling mixture. This will allow free expanding of the concrete without cracks.

To provide even edges of the freshly laid concrete the formwork should be cleaned and lubricated with МА Оil 100 formwork (mould) oil before each application. When laying the concrete the formwork should have the same height with the concrete layer. Installation of reinforcement elements between formwork structures will protect elastic joint filling mixture used to prevent continuous movement of the freshly laid concrete, which in its turn will increase the useful life of the joint filling mixture.

Structure. The metal structure size should not exceed the borders of the formwork. When assembling the structures from ready cut-and-bent reinforcement elements they should be laid one over another and distributed across the surface. To prevent formation of cracks on the concrete due to heavy loads the expansion gaps should be provided. Because of movement in horizontal or any other direction the intermediate structures should not exceed the borders of the formwork and should be attached to the formwork.

Primer. To increase the adhesive force between old concrete and the fresh concrete layer when laying monolithic concrete, epoxide (resin) based adhesives or  primers increasing adhesive force should be applied onto the rough surface of the old concrete before pouring fresh concrete.

Pouring of concrete. Primarily, the formwork should be places in accordance with the guide screeds. Prior to starting concrete pouring procedure the required number of STALTOP 500 sacks should be placed near the formwork. The thickness of the laid concrete should be 7 cm maximum, the water/cement proportion should be at least 0.45, and the concrete grade should be S 25 or higher. When pouring the concrete into the square-sectioned formwork the concrete should be tampered using vibrator tool. Before water occurs on the concrete surface the surface should be finished using screed or wooden trowel, the water from the surface should be removed using long wooden trowel. The composition of concrete or the screed floor subject to the STALTOP 500 application should be prepared in accordance with the loads and soil conditions in the area of application. The surface hardener increases resistance of the concrete top layer to weathering and impacts, but does not impose any influence on the concrete strength, therefore any failures resulting in occurrence of cracks on the concrete surface may cause the same problems in the concrete surface hardener. The required amount of the concrete surface hardener for the operation should be available at the work site.

Before the concrete surface hardener application the lower guide screed edges should be V-cut to form approximately 5х5 mm triangle cutouts along the gaps. The cut areas should be filled with the STALTOP 500 mixed with a small amount of water. This procedure prevents spalling of the edges under loads. In order to prevent segregation of the additive substances in the composition of the concrete surface hardener during application the product should be strewn thickly. The application process may differ depending on the actual ambient or weather conditions.

The strewing works may be started once the concrete hardening has reached such degree when walking on its surface leaves maximum 0.5-1.0 cm deep footprints. The product should not be strewn by portions. As far as possible the surface should be strewn equally and screeded using an appropriate tool. In case the product is applied by portions,  all extra amounts of the product should be immediately removed and the surface should be screeded. The first step of the procedure is to strew 2/3 of the total product amount planned for application onto the concrete surface and to screed it with a float trowel. Once the applied product has changed its color absorbing water from the concrete it should be finished using special equipment (concrete helicopter) in order to facilitate bonding between the surface hardener and the concrete. Then the rest of the product should be strewn onto the concrete surface similar to the above step, and the specified  procedures should be repeated. Prior to finishing the surface with the help of the concrete helicopter, extra amounts of the product strewn earlier onto the concrete surface should be removed with a brush.

After the first step finishing, the second step finishing is performed with concrete grinder blades. Grinding is performed till the required glazing degree is achieved. In order to prevent formation of small cracks, immediately after application of the hardener the moisture retaining МА Кür product should be applied onto the surface. This procedure enhances the effect of the STALTOP 500 application and helps to obtain the best results. The МА Кür product may be used both in summer and in winter.

The hardener application period may vary depending on the quality and grade of the concrete used and on the ambient conditions. In warm weather this period is shorter, while in cold weather it is increased. Prior to application pay attention to the hardening period of the concrete.

Recommendations. At the time of STALTOP 500 product application  the ambient and soil temperatures should be between +50C and +300C. The process of the surface hardening should be controlled by qualified specialists. Application of the concrete surface hardener increases resistance of the surface to wear and impacts, but does not impose any influence on its mechanical strength. On this reason the concrete subject to the surface hardener application should be prepared taking into consideration all the possible effects. When applying STALTOP 500 the thickness of the freshly laid concrete should be at least 7 cm, the water/cement proportion should be at least 0.45, and the concrete used should be grade S 25 or higher. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the STALTOP 500 product can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Technical specifications

Color

Red, grey, green

Composition of the product

Powder mix containing modified polymer, cement based, includes quartz sand and additive substances

Strength limits:

  • compression

 

75-80 N/mm2

Abrasive strength:

  • By Bohme method
  • By Capon method

 

6-8 g/cm3/50 mm2/2nd class

67 mm3 (at 100 turns)

Packing

25 kg sacks made of 2- or 3-layer craft paper and 1 layer of polyethylene

Consumption

Depending on the purpose and traffic load the product consumption may be within 4-8 kg/m2. In case a light color is selected the minimum consumption shall be 7 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months in original sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"STALTOP 500\" cement based hardener with quartz additive for concrete surfaces","description":"\"STALTOP 500\" cement based hardener with quartz additive for concrete surfaces","keywords":"\"STALTOP 500\" cement based hardener with quartz additive for concrete surfaces"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [102] => Array ( [id] => 102 [status] => 1 [title] => "STALTOP" 600 cement based concrete surface hardener with metal additives [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 305 [product_id] => 102 [language] => en [title] => "STALTOP" 600 cement based concrete surface hardener with metal additives [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Cement based, ready for application, concrete surface hardener with metal additives, contains modified polymers, improves the product quality and expands application areas, to be spread as powder onto freshly laid concrete surfaces subjected to traffic of heavy vehicle and motor truck loads . The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993), GOST 10181-76, and GOST 28013-98, standards.

Fields of Application

This surface hardener can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. At least one day before laying fresh concrete onto existing concrete surface the latter should be thoroughly saturated with water, however there should be no free water accumulation left on the surface. STALTOP 600 should be strewn onto the freshly laid concrete surface. Before application the floor formworks should be arranged in square sections, cracks control expansion joints should be provided, and concrete should be laid in accordance with these requirements. To prevent formation of cracks in the freshly laid concrete the expansion gaps approximately 1 cm deep should be provided along the perimeter of the square sections once the concrete is laid, and foam plastic panels should be places in the mentioned gaps. After the concrete is laid the foam plastic panels should be removed, and the expansion gaps should be filled with Fugaton elastic joint filling mixture designed for concrete. It allows free expansion of the freshly laid concrete and prevents formation of cracks.

To provide even edges to the freshly laid concrete the floor formwork should be cleaned and lubricated with МА Оil 100 mould oil prior each laying operation. When pouring the concrete the floor formwork top edge should be at the same level with the concrete layer surface. Installation of intermediate reinforcement elements into the formwork will eliminate continuous movement of the concrete thus reducing the stresses on the joints filled with elastic mixtures, and this in its turn will increase the useful life of the joint filling mixture.

Structure. The metal structure size should not exceed the overall dimensions of the formwork. When assembling the structure from ready cut-and-bent reinforcement elements the steel elements should be laid one over another. To prevent the risk of crack formation on the concrete caused by heavy loads the crack-control joints should be provided. Due to movement within the joints in horizontal or any other direction the intermediate structure should not exceed the overall dimensions of the formwork, and should be attached to the formwork reinforcement elements.

Primer. To increase the adhesive force between old concrete and the fresh concrete layer when laying monolithic concrete the epoxide (resin) based adhesive or primer increasing adhesive force should be applied onto the rough surface of old concrete before pouring fresh concrete.

Pouring of concrete. Primarily the formwork should be places in accordance with the guide screeds. Prior to starting concrete pouring procedure the required number of STALTOP 500 sacks should be placed near the framework. The thickness of the laid concrete layer should be maximum 7 cm, the water/cement proportion should be at least 0.45, and the concrete grade should be S 25 or higher. When pouring the concrete into the square-sectioned formwork the concrete should be tampered using a vibrator tool. Before water occurs on the concrete surface the surface should be finished a with a screed or wooden trowel, the water from the surface should be removed using long wooden trowel.

The composition of concrete or the screed floor subject to STALTOP 600 application should be prepared in accordance with the loads and soil conditions in the area of application. The surface hardener increases resistance of the concrete top layer to the weathering and impacts, but does not impose any influence on the concrete strength, therefore any failures resulting in occurrence of cracks on the concrete surface may cause the same problems in the concrete surface hardener.

The required amount of the concrete surface hardener for the operation should be available at the work site.

Before the concrete surface hardener application the lower guide screed edges should be V-cut to form approximately 5х5 mm triangle cutouts along the joints. The cut area should be filled with the STALTOP 500 mixed with a small amount of water. This procedure prevents spalling of the edges under loads. In order to prevent segregation of the additive substances in the composition of the concrete surface hardener during application the product should be strewn thickly. The application process may differ depending on the actual ambient or weather conditions.

The strewing works may be started once the concrete hardening has reached such degree when walking on its surface leaves maximum 0.5-1.0 cm deep footprints.

The product should not be strewn by portions. As far as possible the surface should be strewn equally and screeded using an appropriate tool.

In case the product is applied by portions, all extra amounts of the product should be immediately removed and the surface should be screeded.

The first step of the procedure is to strew 2/3 of the total product amount planned for application onto the concrete surface, and to screed it  with a float trowel.

Once the applied product has changed its color absorbing water from the concrete, it should be finished using special equipment (concrete helicopter) in order to facilitate bonding between the surface hardener and the concrete. Then the rest of the product should be strewn onto the concrete surface similar to the above step, and the specified procedures should be repeated.

Prior to finishing the surface with the help of the concrete helicopter, extra amounts of the product strewn earlier onto the concrete surface should first be removed with a brush

After the first step finishing, the second step finishing is performed with concrete grinder blades. Grinding is performed till the desired degree of glazing is achieved. In order to prevent formation of small cracks, immediately after application of the hardener the moisture retaining МА Кür product should be applied onto the surface. This procedure enhances the effect of the STALTOP 600 application and helps to obtain the best results. The МА Кür product may be used both in summer and in winter.

The hardener application period may vary depending on the quality and grade of the concrete used and on the ambient conditions. In the warm weather this period is shorter, while in the cold weather it is increased. Prior to application pay attention to the hardening period of the concrete.

Recommendations. At the time of STALTOP 600 product application the ambient and soil temperatures should be between +50C and +300C. The process of the surface hardening should be controlled by qualified specialists. Application of the concrete surface hardener increases resistance of the surface to ear and impacts, but does not impose any influence on its mechanical strength. On this reason the concrete subject to the surface hardener application should be prepared taking into consideration all the possible effects.  When applying STALTOP 600 the thickness of the freshly laid concrete should be at least 7 cm, the water/cement proportion should be at least 0.45, and concrete used should be grade S 25 or higher. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the STALTOP 600 product can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Technical specifications

Color

Red, grey, green

Composition of the product

Powder mix, containing modified polymer, cement based, includes metal and additive substances

Compression strength limits:

  • in 1 day
  • in 28 days

 

42 N/mm2

85 N/mm2

Abrasive strength:

  • By Bohme method

 

 

2.5-3.0 g/cm3/50 mm2

(on the cubic sample with dimensions 71x71x71 mm)

Elasticity module (28 days)

28 N/mm2

Packing

25 kg sacks made of 2- or 3-layer craft paper and 1 layer of polyethylene

Consumption

Depending on the purpose and traffic loads the product consumption may differ as follows:

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months in original sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"STALTOP\" 600 cement based concrete surface hardener with metal additives","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [103] => Array ( [id] => 103 [status] => 1 [title] => "STALTOP" 700 cement based concrete surfaces hardener with corundum additive [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 308 [product_id] => 103 [language] => en [title] => "STALTOP" 700 cement based concrete surfaces hardener with corundum additive [description] =>

Cement based ready for application concrete surface hardener with corundum additive, contains modified polymers improving the product quality and expanding application areas, to be applied as powder onto freshly laid concrete surfaces subject to traffic of heavy vehicle and motor truck loads.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement based ready for application concrete surface hardener with corundum additive, contains modified polymers improving the product quality and expanding application areas, to be applied as powder onto freshly laid concrete surfaces subject to traffic of heavy vehicle and motor truck loads. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993), GOST 10181-76, and GOST 28013-98, standards.

Fields of Application

This surface hardener can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. At least one day before laying fresh concrete onto the existing concrete surface the latter should be thoroughly saturated with water, however there should be no free water left on the surface. STALTOP 700 should be strewn onto the freshly laid concrete surface. Before application the floor formwork should be arranged in square sections, cracks control expansion joints should be provided, and concrete should be laid in accordance with these requirements. To prevent formation of cracks in the freshly laid concrete the expansion gaps approximately 1 cm deep should be provided along the perimeter of the square sections once the concrete is laid, and foam plastic panels should be places in the mentioned gaps. After the concrete is laid the foam plastic panels should be removed, and the expansion gaps should be filled with Fugaton elastic joint filling mixture designed for concrete. It allows free expansion of the freshly laid concrete and prevents formation of cracks.

To provide even edges to the freshly laid concrete, the floor formwork should be cleaned and lubricated with МА Оil 100 mould oil prior to each laying operation. When pouring the concrete, the floor formwork top edges should be at the same level with the concrete layer surface. Installation of intermediate reinforcement elements into the formwork will eliminate continuous movement of the concrete this reducing the stresses applied to the joints filled with elastic joint filling mixtures, this in its turn will increase the useful life of the joint filling mixture.

Structure. The metal structure size should not exceed the overall dimensions of the formwork. When assembling the structure from ready cut-and-bent reinforcement elements the steel elements should be laid one over another. To prevent the risk of crack formation on the concrete surface caused by heavy loads, the crack-control joints should be provided. Due to movement within the joints in horizontal or any other direction, the intermediate structure should not exceed the overall dimensions of the formwork, and should be attached to the formwork reinforcement elements.

Primer. To increase the adhesive force between old concrete and the fresh concrete layer when laying monolithic concretes, the epoxide (resin) based adhesive or a primer increasing adhesive force should be applied onto the rough surface of old concrete before pouring fresh concrete.

Pouring of concrete. Primarily the formwork should be places in accordance with guide screeds. Prior to starting concrete pouring procedure the required number of STALTOP 700 sacks should be placed near the formwork. The thickness of the laid concrete layer should be maximum 7 cm, the water/cement proportion should be at least 0.45, and the concrete grade should be S 25 or higher. When pouring the concrete into the square-sectioned formwork, the concrete should be tampered using a vibrator tool. Before water occurs on the concrete surface, the surface should be finished using a screed or wooden trowel, and the water from the surface should be removed using a long wooden trowel.

The composition of concrete or the screed floor subject to STALTOP 700 application should be prepared in accordance with the loads and soil conditions in the area of application. The surface hardener increases resistance of the concrete top layer to the weathering and impacts, but does not impose any influence on the concrete strength, therefore any failures resulting in occurrence of cracks on the concrete surface may cause the same problems in the concrete surface hardener.

The required amount of the concrete surface hardener for the operation should be available at the work site.

Before the concrete surface hardener application the lower guide screed edges should be V-cut to form approximately 5х5 mm deep triangle cutouts along the joints. The cut area should be filled with the STALTOP 700 mixed with a small amount of water. This procedure prevents spalling of the edges under loads. In order to prevent segregation of the additive substances in the composition of the concrete surface hardener during application, the product should be strewn thickly. The application process may differ depending on the actual ambient or weather conditions.

The strewing works may start once the concrete hardening has reached such degree when walking on the its surface leaves maximum 0.5-1.0 cm deep footprints.

The product should not be strewn by portions. As far as possible the surface should be strewn equally and screeded using an appropriate tool.

In case the product is applied by portions, all the extra amounts of the product should be immediately removed and the surface should be screeded.

The first step of the procedure is to strew 2/3 of the total product amount planned for application onto the concrete surface, and to screed it with a float trowel.

Once the applied product has changed its color absorbing water from the concrete, it should be finished using special equipment (concrete helicopter) in order to facilitate bonding between the surface hardener and the concrete layer. Then the rest of the product should be strewn onto the concrete surface similar to the above step, and the specified procedures should be repeated.

Prior to finishing the surface with the help of the concrete helicopter, the extra amount of the product strewn earlier onto the concrete surface should first be removed with a brush.

After the first step finishing, the second step finishing is performed  using concrete grinder blades. Grinding is performed till the desired degree of glazing is achieved. In order to prevent formation of small cracks, immediately after application of the hardener, the moisture retaining МА Кür product should be applied onto the surface. This procedure enhances the effect of the STALTOP 700 application and helps to obtain the best results. The МА Кür product may be used both in summer and in winter.

The hardener application period may vary depending on the quality and grade of the concrete used and on the ambient conditions. In warm weather this period is shorter, while in cold weather it is increased. Prior to application pay attention to the hardening period of the concrete.

Recommendations. At the time of the STALTOP 700 product application the ambient and soil temperatures should be between +50C and +300C. The process of the surface hardening should be controlled by qualified specialists. Easily applied the concrete surface hardener increases resistance of the surface to weathering and impacts, but does not impose any influence on its mechanical strength. On this reason the concrete subject to the surface hardener application should be prepared taking into consideration all the possible effects.  When applying STALTOP 700 the thickness of the freshly laid concrete should be at least 7 cm, the water/cement proportion should be at least 0.45, and the concrete used should be grade S 25 or higher. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water. After hardening the STALTOP 700 product can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Technical specifications

Color

Red, grey, green

Composition of the product

Cement based powder mix containing modified polymer,  and corundum additive substances

Strength limits:

  • compression

 

70 N/mm2

Abrasive strength:

  • By Capon method

 

3 (100 turns)

Packing

25 kg sacks made of 2- or 3-layer craft paper and 1 layer of polyethylene

Consumption

Depending on the purpose and traffic loads the product consumption may be within 4-8 kg/m2. In case light color is selected the minimum consumption will be 7 kg/m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months in original sacks in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"STALTOP\" 700 cement based concrete surfaces hardener with corundum additive","description":"\"STALTOP\" 700 cement based concrete surfaces hardener with corundum additive","keywords":"\"STALTOP\" 700 cement based concrete surfaces hardener with corundum additive"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [104] => Array ( [id] => 104 [status] => 1 [title] => "Staltop EX-50" solvent-free epoxide based two-component surface hardener [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 311 [product_id] => 104 [language] => en [title] => "Staltop EX-50" solvent-free epoxide based two-component surface hardener [description] =>

Epoxide based solvent-free two-component surface hardener, transparent or colored.

[more] =>

Product description

Epoxide based solvent-free two-component surface hardener, transparent or colored.

Fields of Application

This surface hardener can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. The surfaces to be treated with the Staltop EX-50 product should be primed with suitable Staltop primer before application. Transparent Staltop EX-50 product can also be used as primer. The product should be applied to completely cover the pre-primed surface. When applying the product the surface temperature should be at least +50C.

Preparation of the mixtureThe Staltop EX-50 product is manufactured ready for application taking into consideration the proportion of the mixture. Prior to preparation of the material the ambient temperatures level between +150C and +250C should be provided. Component A of the Staltop EX-50 product has pigment composition. Thoroughly mix Component A using a 300-400 RPM mechanical mixer till the color is entirely homogeneous. Then pour the total amount of Component B into Component A. Mix the received mixture for at least 3 minutes using the 300-400 RPM mechanical mixer till it is entirely homogeneous. The materials on the inside walls and bottom of the mixing container should be thoroughly mixed as well. Wait a little before pouring the mixture from the mixing container into another metal container. Then mix again for 1 minute and then the product is ready for application. Before applying the Staltop EX-50 surface hardener, the mixtures of the product with quartz sand in 1.0/1.5 or 1.0/2.0 proportions may be used.

Mixing ratio

Staltop EX-50

Component A

Component B

Amount of the mixture

6 kg

3 kg

Mixture density

1.10 kg/l

Application. Apply the Staltop EX-50 product onto the surface at required thickness using a toothed trowel. Depending on the conditions of the obtained layer of the required thickness after the product application, it may be necessary to remove the air entrapped in it. Use a roller stitcher for this.

Recommendations. At the time of application the surface temperature should be between +50C and +300C. The product should not be used in rainy or windy weather conditions, and at excessive temperatures. Materials used in the process should be delivered to the construction site at corresponding temperature 1-2 days before the works, placed to storage and kept in accordance with the specified weather conditions. In case the product is applied in very cold weather conditions, the ambient and surface temperatures should be increased with the help of a heater. At the time of application the temperature of the packed product should be between +200C and +250C. Epoxide and polyurethane based surface hardeners should be applied by qualified specialists only. Resin based hardeners at low temperatures reduce the chemical reaction rate depending on the period of work and reaction, surface temperature and ambient humidity. This also increases the hardening period of the surface and the useful life of the product. At the same time the consumption increases as the thickness grows. At high temperatures chemical reactions accelerate, and the mentioned above parameters reduce.

To provide complete drying the ambient and surface temperatures should not fall below the allowed minimum. When using the product the surface should be protected from contact with water within at least 24 hours. In case of contact with water before the 24-hour period expiration, liming and softening of the surface will occur, and as the result the applied product will lose its specified properties. In this case the product should be removed from the surface and replaced with fresh one.

As the Staltop EX-50 product is manufactured ready for application, do not mix it with any solvents, etc, when using. The product should be mixed with a 300-400 RPM mechanical mixer. It is not allowed to mix the product by hands. After the first mixing stage is accomplished the mixture should be mandatory poured into another clean container and mixed again. After use of the product all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with detergent. After hardening the Staltop EX-50 product can be removed from the surface by mechanical means only.

Technical specifications

Color

Transparent and colored

Storage temperature

-200 C - +800 C

Density

1.10 kg/liter

Resistance to:

  • compression
  • flexural
  • peeling off

 

>60 N/mm2

>25 N/mm2

>2 N/mm2

Useful life

60 minutes

Time to put into operation for traffic loads:

  • at the temperature +100 C
  • at the temperature +200 C
  • at the temperature +300 C

 

In 7 days

In 3 days

In 2 days

Full hardening period

In 7 days

Packing:

Staltop EX-50 colored

  • Component A
  • Component B

Staltop EX-50 transparent

  • Component A
  • Component B

 

 

6.0 kg iron cans

3.0 kg iron cans

 

5.54 kg iron cans

3.0 kg iron cans

Consumption

Depending on the application area the Staltop EX-50 product consumption may differ.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months packed in original sacks in dry and cool conditions, protected from freezing. For short-term storage period the sacks may be placed one upon the other in three layers, and at the time of application the lower layer sacks should be used first. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"Staltop EX-50\" solvent-free epoxide based two-component surface hardener","description":"\"Staltop EX-50\" solvent-free epoxide based two-component surface hardener","keywords":"\"Staltop EX-50\" solvent-free epoxide based two-component surface hardener"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [105] => Array ( [id] => 105 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA Şap" 100 self levelling mortar (up to 1 cm thickness) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 314 [product_id] => 105 [language] => en [title] => "MA Şap" 100 self levelling mortar (up to 1 cm thickness) [description] =>

Cement-based monocomponent flooring mixture, rich in chemical mixtures, providing formation of imporous surface. It is levelled in a self-levelling manner.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement-based monocomponent flooring mixture, rich in chemical mixtures, providing formation of imporous surface. It is levelled in a self-levelling manner. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of surface. Please pay attention to the surface to be checked and be strong and removed of residues preventing adhesion. In case the surface has cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mortar. The surface should be primed with Binmader primer to reduce the ability of water absorption of the surface and  increase its resistance.

Preparation of mixture.Gently pour out 20 kg dry mixture onto 4,0 liter water, and mix until balls and air bubbles disappear (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use poor circulation mixer).

Application. Pour the prepared liquid mixture onto the surface. To remove air bubbles from the mixture during the application, and facilitate the levelling procedure, use prickly roller. If required, a steel trowel can be used to accelerate levelling. The surface applied with the product should be protected from wind and direct sun for 24-hour period.

Recommendations. In case the MA Şap product ambient temperature is within +50C and +300C, a required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in hot (more than +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all appliances and tools should be cleaned with water.

Technical specifications

Color

Grey

Operating temperature

+50 C - +300 C

Water /dry mixture ratio

4,0 liter of water /20 kg  powder mix

Useful life

35 minutes

Application thickness

3,0 – 10,0 mm

Hardening period:

  • initial
  • final

 

In 15-30 minutes

In 60-90 minutes

Compression strength limit:

  • in 7 days
  • in 28 days

 

23 MPa

35 MPa

Adhesion

1,2 MPa

Period of putting into operation

In 6 hours the surface can be open for movement. After 24 hours carpet, parquet, ceramics, etc. can be applied onto the surface.

Packing

20 kg sacks made of 2 or 3-layer kraft paper and 1 layer of polyethilene

Consumption

The product consumption for 1 m2 surface area with 1 mm thickness is 1.75 kg.

Shelf Life and storage

The product can be stored during 12 months in dry conditions, with maximum 10 sacks laid one on another.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA Şap\" 100 self levelling mortar (up to 1 cm thickness)","description":"\"MA Şap\" 100 self levelling mortar (up to 1 cm thickness)","keywords":"\"MA Şap\" 100 self levelling mortar (up to 1 cm thickness)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 mm [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [106] => Array ( [id] => 106 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA Şap" 200 self levelling mortar 20 kg (up to 1-3 cm thickness) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 317 [product_id] => 106 [language] => en [title] => "MA Şap" 200 self levelling mortar 20 kg (up to 1-3 cm thickness) [description] =>

Cement-based monocomponent flooring mixture, rich in chemical mixtures, providing formation of imporous surface. It is levelled in a self-spreading manner.

[more] =>

Product description

Cement-based monocomponent flooring mixture, rich in chemical mixtures, providing formation of imporous surface. It is levelled in a self-spreading manner. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 039-2000 (TS 11140-1993) standard.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of surface. Please pay attention to the surface to be checked and strong and removed of residues preventing adhesion. In case the surface has cracks or pores, they should be filled with Filkret repair mortar. The surface should be primed with Binmader primer to reduce the ability of water absorption of the surface and  increase its resistance.

Preparation of mixture. Gently pour out 20 kg dry mixture onto 4,0 liter water, and mix until balls and air bubbles disappear (to prepare the mixture it is recommended to use poor circulation mixer).

Application. Pour the prepared liquid mixture onto the surface. To remove air bubbles from the mixture during the application, and facilitate the levelling procedure, use prickly roller. If required, a steel trowel can be used to accelerate levelling. In case it is required to obtain 20,0 mm thickness, the MA Şap product should be applied in 2 layers. The period between the layers may be 60-90-minutes depending on the temperature. The surface applied with the product should be protected from wind and direct sun for 24-hour period.

Recommendations. In case the MA Şap product ambient temperature is within +50C and +300C, a required temperature should be provided. The product should not be used in hot (more than +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all appliances and tools should be cleaned with water.

Technical specifications

Color

Grey

Operating temperature

+50 C - +300 C

Water /dry mixture ratio

4,0 liter of water /20 kg  dry mixture

Useful life

35 minutes

Application thickness

10,0 – 30,0 mm

Hardening period:

  • initial
  • final

 

In 15-30 minutes

In 60-90 minutes

Compression strength limit:

  • in 2 days
  • in 7 days
  • in 28 days

 

3,0 MPa

20,0 MPa

30,0 MPa

Adhesion

2,0 MPa

Period of putting into operation

In 6 hours the surface can be open for movement. In 24 hours carpet, parquet, tiles, etc. can be applied onto the surface.

Packing

20 kg sacks made of 2 or 3-layer kraft paper and 1 layer of polyethilene

Consumption

The product consumption for 1 m2 surface area with 1mm thickness is 1,75 kg.

Shelf Life and storage

The product can be stored during 12 months in dry conditions, with maximum 10 sacks laid one on another.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA Şap\" 200 self levelling mortar (up to 1-3 cm thickness)","description":"\"MA Şap\" 200 self levelling mortar (up to 1-3 cm thickness)","keywords":"\"MA Şap\" 200 self levelling mortar (up to 1-3 cm thickness)"} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [108] => Array ( [id] => 108 [status] => 1 [title] => "BEMATON" 3055 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 320 [product_id] => 108 [language] => en [title] => "BEMATON" 3055 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] =>

BEMATON 3055 is a polycarboxylate ether based, high water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (increasing concrete plastic properties) concrete admixture, which prevents decrease of concrete viscosity, provides high resistance and strength, and is improved for concrete industry.

[more] =>

Product description

BEMATON 3055 is a polycarboxylate ether based, high water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (increasing concrete plastic properties) concrete admixture, which prevents decrease of concrete viscosity, provides high resistance and strength, and is improved for concrete industry.

The product conforms to the requirements of the following standards: AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2), Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (increasing concrete plastic properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type FF: “high water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Add 50-70% of the required water amount and then add the BEMATON 3055 product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of BEMATON 3055 mixture vigorously mix it during 60 seconds or during time period predefined in the process of laboratory tests.

Chemical mechanism of the latest generation plasticizers reactionDuring the very initial stage of concrete mixing the surfaces of cement particles are covered with conventional melamine and naphthalenesulfonate based super plasticizing polymers. Sulfated groups of polymer chains increase negative loading of cement particles, and these particles are repelled by electrostatic force. This electrostatic mechanism results in disintegration of the cement paste, and enhances usage and preparation of the concrete with smaller amount of water added. Simultaneously the hydration process starts. The fast-growing hydration crystals change the surface mechanism of the particle, therefore preventing free disintegration of the particle surfaces.

The difference between the BEMATON 3055 product and conventional super plasticizers (NSM or MSM) is in this new unique mechanism of influence which improves performance of the cement fraction.

The BEMATON 3055 consists of long-chain carboxylate ether polymers. At the beginning of mixing process the electrostatic repelling mechanism starts similar to that of conventional super plasticizers. This process results in producing the plasticized concrete (with better plastic properties) due to significant reduction of the water demand. However the polymer bound chains stabilize disintegration and repellence properties of cement particles and create a sterile barrier. Due to this feature the smaller amount of water provides the higher plasticity (flow properties).

High alkalinity of cement paste provides unwinding and expansion of additional polymer chains in the structure of the BEMATON 3055 product preventing premature thickening of the concrete. This mechanism, compared to conventional super plasticizers of hardening inhibitor properties, does not inhibit the concrete hardening, but provides conditions for its long-term useful life and significant reduction of intensive water demand.

Compatibility to other admixtures. BEMATON 3055 may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

polycarboxylate ether based

Color:

brown

Density

1.04-1.05 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<3.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

Consumption

It is recommended to add the product in proportion of 1.0-2.0% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, amount of the admixture should be defined during preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

BEMATON 3055 should be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding of water, then should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers may be used during entire storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"BEMATON\" 3055 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"\"BEMATON\" 3055 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture","keywords":"\"BEMATON\" 3055 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture"} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [109] => Array ( [id] => 109 [status] => 1 [title] => "BEMATON" 3060 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 323 [product_id] => 109 [language] => en [title] => "BEMATON" 3060 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] =>

BEMATON 3060 is polycarboxylate ether based, high water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (increasing concrete plastic properties) concrete admixture, which provides high resistance and strength, and is improved for concrete industry.

[more] =>

Product description

BEMATON 3060 is polycarboxylate ether based, high water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (increasing concrete plastic properties) concrete admixture, which provides high resistance and strength, and is improved for concrete industry. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (increasing concrete plastic properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type F standard: “high water reducing, last generation super plasticizing concrete additive” standards.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesive substances (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Add 50-70% of the required water amount and then add the BEMATON 3060 product together with remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of BEMATON 3060 mixture mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during time period predefined by the laboratory test results.

Chemical mechanism of latest generation plasticizers actionDuring the very initial stages of concrete mixing the surfaces of cement particles are covered with conventional melamine and naphthalene sulfonate based super plasticizing polymers. Sulfated groups of polymer chains increase negative loading of cement particles, and these particles are repelled by electrostatic force. This electrostatic mechanism results in disintegration of cement paste, and enhances usage and preparation of the concrete with smaller amount of water added. Simultaneously the hydration process starts. The fast-growing hydration crystals change the surface mechanism of the particles, therefore preventing free disintegration of the particle surfaces.

The difference between the BEMATON 3060 product and conventional super plasticizers (NSM or MSM) is in this new unique mechanism of influence increasing which improves performance of the cement fraction.

The BEMATON 3060 consists of long-chain carboxylate ether polymers. At the beginning of mixing process the electrostatic repelling mechanism starts similar to that of conventional super plasticizers. This process results in producing the plasticized concrete (with better plastic properties) due to significant reduction of the water demand. However the polymer bound chains stabilize disintegration and repellence properties of cement particles and create a sterile barrier. Due to this feature the smaller amount of water provides the higher plasticity (flow properties).

Compatibility to other admixtures. BEMATON 3060 may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

polycarboxylate ether based

Color:

brown

Density

1.082-1.142 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<3.0%

Package:

10 kg cans, 200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

Consumption

It is recommended to add the product in the proportion of 0.7-0.9% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the particular amount of the admixture should be defined during preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

BEMATON 3060 may be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperatures equal to or above +50C. The product stored  unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water to it, then should be mixed using mechanical methods till it gets entirely homogeneous. During mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers may be used during entire storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"BEMATON\" 3060 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"\"BEMATON\" 3060 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture","keywords":"\"BEMATON\" 3060 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture"} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 1-2%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [110] => Array ( [id] => 110 [status] => 1 [title] => "BEMATON" ZES 3035 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 326 [product_id] => 110 [language] => en [title] => "BEMATON" ZES 3035 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

BEMATON ZES 3035 is polycarboxylate ether based, high water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (increasing concrete plastic properties) concrete admixture, which provides high resistance and early strength, and is improved for concrete industry. The product conforms to requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (increasing concrete plastic properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM CC 494 Type F standard: “high water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Zero Energy System

Zero Energy System is a complex of latest generation rheodynamic concrete technologies improving the new BEMATON ZES 3035 admixture. This system improves the product quality and operating conditions during production of prefabricated concrete products, reduces energy expenses and provides cost-effective manufacturing process.

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Add 50-70% of the required water amount, and then add the BEMATON ZES 3035 product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of BEMATON  ZES 3035 mixture, mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during time period predefined by the  laboratory tests.

Chemical mechanism of the latest generation plasticizers reactionSpecific molecular structure of the BEMATON ZES 3035 product accelerates hydration of cement. Fast absorption of the BEMATON ZES 3035 molecules by cement particles facilitates reaction with water thus enhancing the cement particle surface area, simultaneously providing better flow properties. Due to this effect hydration starts earlier, and the cement early expansion provides higher strength.

Compatibility to other admixtures. BEMATON ZES 3035 may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

polycarboxylate ether based

Color:

brown

Density

1.06-1.07 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<3.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

Consumption

It is recommended to use the product in proportion of 0.8-1.0% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixture should be defined in based on preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

BEMATON ZES 3035 should be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers may be used during entire storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"BEMATON\" ZES 3035 the newest generation super plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [111] => Array ( [id] => 111 [status] => 1 [title] => "FLOTON" 2100 K concrete admixture for cold weather conditions [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 329 [product_id] => 111 [language] => en [title] => "FLOTON" 2100 K concrete admixture for cold weather conditions [description] => [more] =>

Product description

FLOTON 2100 K is a naphthalene sulfonate based, high water reduction, super plasticizing (enhances concrete flow properties) concrete admixture increasing concrete early and ultimate strength, providing rheoplastic features of the concrete. Conformance code: 04.613/1-А3 The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (improving concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM CC 494 Type F standard: “high water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Add 50-70% of the required water amount and then add the FLOTON 2100 K product together with remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of FLOTON 2100 K mixture mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during time period predefined by the laboratory tests.

Chemical admixtures reaction principleThe admixtures react mainly with adhesives. When the super plasticizer admixture is added to the concrete it is absorbed by the adhesive particles. The adhesive particles are repelled from each other under the effect of electrostatic force. Thus, the smaller amounts of water provide required application conditions of the mixture. The mechanical strength of the concrete increases proportionally to the reduction of water content in the mixture.

Compatibility to other admixtures. FLOTON 2100 K may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

Naphthalene sulfonate based

Color:

brown

Density

1.15-1.21 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<3.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the FLOTON 2100 K product in proportion of 0.8-1.4% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixture should be defined based on preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

FLOTON 2100 K should be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperatures equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When  mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers may be used during the entire storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

in case the amount of product added exceeds the recommended value, the mixture hardening period may increase. In these cases it is necessary to provide the required longer curing time for concrete hardening in the reinforcement structures.

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FLOTON\" 2100 K concrete admixture for cold weather conditions","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 1-2%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [112] => Array ( [id] => 112 [status] => 1 [title] => "FLOTON" 2105 R super plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 332 [product_id] => 112 [language] => en [title] => "FLOTON" 2105 R super plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

FLOTON 2105 R is naphthalene sulfonate based, high water reduction, super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture which provides increased hardening period, higher ultimate strength of the concrete and rheoplastic features of the concrete. Conformance code: 04.613/1-А3 The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type F standard: “high water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. Add 50-70% of the required water amount and then the FLOTON 2105 R product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of FLOTON 2105 R mixture, mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during time period predefined based on the laboratory test results.

Chemical admixtures action principleThe admixtures react mainly with adhesives. When the admixture is added to the concrete it is absorbed by the adhesive particles. The adhesive particles are repelled from each other under the effect of electrostatic force. Thus, the smaller amount of water provides the required application conditions. The concrete mechanical strength increases proportionally to the reduction of water in the mixture.

Compatibility to other admixtures. FLOTON 2105 R may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

naphthalenesulfonate based

Color:

brown

Density

1.12-1.14 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the FLOTON  2105  R product in proportion of 0.8-1.4% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixtures should be defined based on preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

FLOTON 2105 R may be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers may be used during entire storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FLOTON\" 2105 R super plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 0,8-1,4%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [113] => Array ( [id] => 113 [status] => 1 [title] => "FLOTON" 2118 super plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 335 [product_id] => 113 [language] => en [title] => "FLOTON" 2118 super plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

FLOTON 2118 is naphthalene sulfonate based, high water reduction, super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture which provides increased hardening period, increased ultimate strength of concrete and provides rheoplastic features of the concrete. Conformance code: 04.613/1-А3 The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type F standard: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesive substances (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After 50-70% of the required water amount is added, start to add the FLOTON 2118 product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of FLOTON 2118 mixture, mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during the time period predefined by the laboratory tests.

Chemical admixtures reaction principleThe admixtures react mainly with adhesives. When the admixtures are added into the concrete they are absorbed by the adhesive particles. The adhesive particles are repelled from each other under the effect of electrostatic force. Thus, the smaller amount of water provides the required application conditions. The concrete mechanical strength increases proportionally to the reduction of water amount in the mixture.

Compatibility to other admixtures. FLOTON 2118 may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

Naphthalene sulfonate based

Color:

brown

Density

1.16-1.19 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the FLOTON 2118 product in proportion of 1.0-2.0% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixture should be defined based on the preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

FLOTON 2118 should be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers may be used during the entire storage period provided that the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FLOTON\" 2118 super plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 1-2%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [114] => Array ( [id] => 114 [status] => 1 [title] => "FLOTON" 2161 super plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 338 [product_id] => 114 [language] => en [title] => "FLOTON" 2161 super plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

FLOTON 2161 is naphthalene sulfonate based, high water reduction, super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture which improves early and ultimate strength of concrete and provides rheoplastic features of the concrete. Conformance code: 04.613/1-А3

The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type F standard: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture may be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler until the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After 50-70% of the required water amount is added, start to add the FLOTON 2161 product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of FLOTON 2161 mixture mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during time period predefined by the laboratory tests.

Chemical admixtures reaction principleThe admixtures react mainly with adhesives. When the admixture is added to the concrete it is absorbed by the adhesive particles. The adhesive particles are repelled from each other under the effect of electrostatic force. Thus, the smaller amounts of water provide the required application conditions. The concrete mechanical strength is increased proportionally to the reduction of water amount in the mixture.

Compatibility to other admixtures. FLOTON 2161 may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

Naphthalene sulfonate based

Color:

brown

Density

1.15-1.21 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the FLOTON 2161 product in proportion of 1.0-2.0% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of the admixtures should be defined based on the preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

FLOTON 2161 may be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers may be used during the entire storage period provided that the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FLOTON\" 2161 super plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 1-2%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [115] => Array ( [id] => 115 [status] => 1 [title] => "FLOTON" 2166 T super plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 341 [product_id] => 115 [language] => en [title] => "FLOTON" 2166 T super plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

FLOTON 2166 Т is naphthalene sulfonate based, high water reduction, super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture which increases concrete early and ultimate strength and provides rheoplastic features of the concrete. Conformance code: 04.613/1-А3

The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type standard: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesive substances (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After 50-70% of the total required water amount is added, start to add the FLOTON 2166 T product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of FLOTON 2166 T mixture mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during the time period predefined based on the laboratory tests.

Chemical admixtures reaction principleThe admixtures react mainly with adhesives. When the admixture is added to the concrete it is absorbed by the adhesive particles. The adhesive particles are repelled from each other under the effect of electrostatic force. Thus, the smaller amounts of water provide the required application conditions. The concrete mechanical strength increases proportionally to the reduction of water content in mixture.

Compatibility to other admixtures. FLOTON 2166 Т may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

Naphthalene sulfonate based

Color:

brown

Density

1.205-1.225 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the FLOTON 2166 Т product in proportion of 1.0-2.0% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixtures should be defined based on the preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

FLOTON 2166 Т may be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it gets entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers may be used during the entire storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FLOTON\" 2166 T super plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 1-2%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [116] => Array ( [id] => 116 [status] => 1 [title] => "FLOTON" PS 2025 super plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 344 [product_id] => 116 [language] => en [title] => "FLOTON" PS 2025 super plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

FLOTON PS 2025 is a polycarboxylate ether based, high water reduction, super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture, improved for production of prefabricated concrete of higher early and ultimate strength and resistance, including the factory manufactured pre-cast concrete. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type F standard: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After 50-70% of the total required water amount is added, start to add the FLOTON PS 2025 product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of FLOTON PS 2025 mixture mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during time period predefined by the laboratory tests.

Chemical mechanism of super plasticizers reactionSpecific molecular structure of the FLOTON PS 2025 product accelerates hydration of cement. Fast absorption of the FLOTON PS 2025 molecules by cement particles facilitates reaction with water enhancing the cement particle surface area, simultaneously providing effective disintegration. This effect results in early hydration start, and early expanding of cement provides high strength.

Compatibility to other admixtures. FLOTON PS 2025 may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

polycarboxylate ether based

Color:

brown

Density

1.023-1.063 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<3.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the FLOTON PS 2025 product in proportion of 1.2-1.8% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixtures should be defined based on the preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

FLOTON PS 2025 may be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers may be used during the entire storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FLOTON\" PS 2025 super plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [117] => Array ( [id] => 117 [status] => 1 [title] => "FLOTON" MOD N super plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 347 [product_id] => 117 [language] => en [title] => "FLOTON" MOD N super plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

FLOTON MOD N is modified lignosulfonate based, plasticizing concrete admixture, used to provide fluid viscosity in production of concrete designed for civil works in all types of climatic conditions and different concrete categories. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type F standard: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. The concrete is loaded in transmixer at the 14±1 cm viscosity (according to the standard the viscosity should be lower in winter). The transmixer operator should also receive from the concrete factory a full can of FLOTON MOD N plasticizing admixture. The can has two marks (lines) indicating 1/3 and 2/3 of the volume. Depending of the number of vehicles waiting in the queue, five minutes before beginning of concrete pouring the transmixer operator should add to the barrel: for 7-9 m3 of concrete - full 10 kg can; for 4-6 m3 of the concrete – 2/3 of the can content; and for 2-3 m3 of concrete – 1/3 of the can content. The barrel should mix the product for three minutes with at highest speed. This period is enough to obtain a homogeneous mixture. At the end of this procedure the concrete viscosity will reach the S-4 index or 6-8 cm increase. In case the delivered concrete meets the required viscosity of the construction site which is S-3 or higher, then the concrete should be unloaded without adding the admixture.

Chemical admixture reaction principle. The admixtures react mainly with adhesives. When the admixture is added to the concrete it is absorbed by the adhesive particles. The adhesive particles are repelled from each other under the effect of electrostatic force. Thus, the smaller amount of water provides the required application conditions. The concrete mechanical strength is increased proportionally to the reduction of water content in the mixture.

Compatibility to other admixtures. FLOTON MOD N may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

Naphthalene sulfonate based

Color:

Brown

Density

1.10-1.12 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the FLOTON MOD N product in proportion of 0.4-0.7% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixtures should be defined based on preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

FLOTON MOD N may be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used. Under the required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers should be used within storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FLOTON\" MOD N super plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [118] => Array ( [id] => 118 [status] => 1 [title] => "FLOMEL" S 100 concrete admixture for areas where transportation of liquid super plasticizers is a complicated issue [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 350 [product_id] => 118 [language] => en [title] => "FLOMEL" S 100 concrete admixture for areas where transportation of liquid super plasticizers is a complicated issue [description] => [more] =>

Product description

FLOMEL S 100 is a melamine sulfonate based powder composition, super plasticizing admixture, used for production of such powder products as cement and gypsum. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Tables 3.1 and 3.2: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type F standard: “High water reduction, latest generation super plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Technical specifications

Composition of product

melamine sulfonate based

Color:

white

Density

1.8-1.9 kg/liter

Package:

25 kg sacks made of craft paper strengthened with polyethylene

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

Amount of the FLOMEL S 100 product in per cents of the mixed product amount should be as follows:

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored in original sacks in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +400C. Under the required storage conditions, the product can be stored in original packing during 24 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers should be used during one week provided the required storage conditions are maintained.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"FLOMEL\" S 100 concrete admixture for areas where transportation of liquid super plasticizers is a complicated issue","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [119] => Array ( [id] => 119 [status] => 1 [title] => "OKETON" 1260 CN normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 353 [product_id] => 119 [language] => en [title] => "OKETON" 1260 CN normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

OKETON 1260 CN is polynaphthalene sulfonate and nitrate salt based, standard plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture designed to accelerate concrete hardening by means of acceleration of chemical reaction between water and cement especially at initial hardening, and to provide increase of early strength. The product is suitable for cold weather conditions. Conformance code: 04.613/7 The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Table 6: “Accelerating hardening, plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixtures”, and ASTM C 494 Type C standard: “Accelerating hardening concrete admixtures”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler until the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After 50-70% of the total required amount of water is added, start to add the OKETON 1260 CN product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of OKETON 1260 CN mixture mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during time period predefined according to the laboratory tests.

Chemical admixtures reaction principal. The OKETON 1260 CN reacts with cement. When the OKETON 1260 CN admixture is added to the mixture it is absorbed by the cement particles. The OKETON 1260 CN accelerates chemical reaction between cement and water in the beginning of hardening, and increases the temperature of hydration. As the result the concrete hardening accelerates, and early strength increases.

Compatibility to other admixtures. OKETON 1260 CN may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

Polynaphthalene sulfonate and nitrate based

Color:

Brown

Density

1.04-1.05 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans, 200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the OKETON 1260 CN product in proportion of 2.5-5.0% of the cement amount. In case of use together with another plasticizer it can be added in proportion of 1.0-2.0% of the cement amount, depending on the other plasticizer type and amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixture should be defined based on preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

OKETON 1260 CN can be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product can be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers should be used within storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

- the value of adhesive force between cement and concrete fillers drops;

-  the concrete strength is lost;

-  cracks and surface cavities are formed in the concrete;

-       materials used in the concrete production (cement, adhesives, concrete fillers, and water) should be stored at suitable ambient temperatures and protected from freezing;

-       suitable grade of cement should be used;

-       proper amount of cement should be determined (350-400 kg/m3);

-       the concrete should be protected from freezing temperatures by means of any admixture accelerating hardening, and the amount of water in the mixture should be reduced, and thus the required quality of application should be provided by means of any suitable plasticizing admixtures;

-       due to stop of hydration at the temperatures below +50C, the required strength and resistance of the concrete ( 5 MPa in average) during hardening should be provided by corresponding hardening methods;

-       in cold weather special attention should be paid to the concrete pouring procedure, there should be no snow or ice in the formwork;

-       to increase the concrete temperature by 10C, it is required to increase the concrete filler temperature by 20C, the temperature of water for the concrete mixture - by 40C, and the cement temperature - by 80

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"OKETON\" 1260 CN normal plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 2,5-5%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [120] => Array ( [id] => 120 [status] => 1 [title] => "OKETON" 1250 ANTİFRİZ normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 356 [product_id] => 120 [language] => en [title] => "OKETON" 1250 ANTİFRİZ normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

OKETON 1250 ANTIFRIZ is polynaphthalene sulfonate and nitrate salt based, standard plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture which accelerates concrete hardening by means of acceleration of chemical reaction between water and cement especially during initial hardening, and provides increase of early strength. The product is suitable for cold weather conditions. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Table 6: “Accelerating hardening, plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM C 494 Type C standard: “Accelerating hardening concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of surface. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler until the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After 50-70% of the total required amount of water is added, start to add the OKETON 1250 ANTIFRIZ product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of OKETON 1250 ANTIFRIZ mixture, mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during the time predefined based on the laboratory test results.

Chemical admixtures reaction principle. The OKETON 1250 ANTIFRIZ reacts with cement. When the OKETON 1250 ANTIFRIZ admixture is added to the mixture it is absorbed by the cement particles. The OKETON 1250 ANTIFRIZ accelerates chemical reaction between cement and water during initial hardening, and increases hydration temperature. As the result the concrete hardening accelerates, and early strength increases.

Compatibility to other admixtures. OKETON 1250 ANTIFRIZ may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

Polynaphthalene sulfonate and nitrate based

Color:

Brown

Density

1.13-1.14 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

In case acceleration of hardening is required, according to requirements of the TS EN 934-2 standard it is recommended to add the OKETON 1250 ANTIFRIZ product in proportion of 2.5-5.0% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixture should be defined based on preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

OKETON 1250 ANTIFRIZ can be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product can be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers should be used within the storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

- the value of adhesive force between cement and concrete fillers drops;

-  the concrete strength is lost;

-  cracks and surface cavities are formed in the concrete;

-       materials used in the concrete production (cement, adhesives, concrete fillers, and water) should be stored at suitable ambient temperatures and should be protected from freezing temperatures;

-       suitable grade of cement should be used;

-       proper amount of applied cement should be determined (350-400 kg/m3);

-       the concrete should be protected from freezing by any hardening accelerating admixture, and the reduced amount of water in the mixture should be provided, thus providing the required application quality by any suitable plasticizing admixture;

-       due to stop of hydration at the temperatures below +50C, the required strength and resistance of the concrete (5 MPa in average) during hardening should be provided by corresponding hardening methods;

-       in cold weather special attention should be paid to the concrete pouring procedure, there should be no snow or ice in the formwork;

to increase the concrete temperature by 10C, it is required to increase the concrete filler temperature by 20C, the temperature of water in the concrete mixture - by 40C, and the cement temperature - by 80C

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"OKETON\" 1250 ANTİFRİZ normal plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 2,5-5%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [121] => Array ( [id] => 121 [status] => 1 [title] => "OKETON" MOD 1223 K normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 359 [product_id] => 121 [language] => en [title] => "OKETON" MOD 1223 K normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

OKETON MOD 1223 K is modified lignosulfonate based, water reduction, standard plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture designed to provide fast hardening of concrete in cold weather conditions, to improve application quality and mechanical features by decreasing water/cement ratio. Conformance code: 04.613/1-А2 The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Table 2: “Water reduction, plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM Type A standard: “Water reduction and plasticizing concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler until the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After 50-70% of the total required water amount is added, start to add the OKETON MOD 1223 К product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of OKETON MOD 1223 K mixture mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during time period predefined based on the laboratory test results.

Chemical admixtures reaction principleThe admixtures react mainly with adhesives. When the admixture is added to the concrete it is absorbed by the adhesive particles. The adhesive particles are repelled from each other under the effect of electrostatic force. Thus, the smaller amounts of water provide the required application conditions. The concrete mechanical strength increases proportionally to the reduction of water content in the mixture.

Compatibility to other admixtures .OKETON MOD 1223 K can be used together with the following materials:

 Technical specifications

Composition of product

Polynaphthalene sulfonate and nitrate based

Color:

Brown

Density

1.11-1.17 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the OKETON MOD 1223 K product in proportion of 0.4-1.2% to the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixtures should be defined based on preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

OKETON MOD 1223 K may be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers should be used within the storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"OKETON\" MOD 1223 K normal plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 0,4-1,2%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [122] => Array ( [id] => 122 [status] => 1 [title] => "OKETON" MOD 1223 S normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 362 [product_id] => 122 [language] => en [title] => "OKETON" MOD 1223 S normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

OKETON MOD 1223 S is modified lignosulfonate based, water reduction, standard plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture designed to prevent fast loss of concrete viscosity in hot weather conditions, improve application quality and mechanical features by decrease of water/cement ratios, and elongate hardening. Conformance code: 04.613/1-А2 The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Table 10: “Elongating hardening, water reduction, plasticizing (improves concrete flow properties) concrete admixture”, and ASTM Type D standard: “Water reduction,  elongating hardening, concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. Mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete filler until the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After 50-70% of the total required amount of water is added, start to add the OKETON MOD 1223 S product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  To provide homogeneous composition of OKETON MOD 1223 S mixture mix it vigorously during 60 seconds or during time period predefined by the laboratory test results.

Chemical admixtures reaction principleThe admixtures react mainly with adhesives. When the admixture is added to the concrete it is absorbed by the adhesive particles. The adhesive particles are repelled from each other under the effect of electrostatic force. Thus, the smaller amount of water provides the required application conditions. The concrete mechanical strength increases proportionally to the reduction of water content in the mixture.

Compatibility to other admixtures. OKETON MOD 1223 S may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

modified lignosulfonate based

Color:

brown

Density

1.19-1.23 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the OKETON MOD 1223 S product in proportion of 0.4-1.2% of the cement amount. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of admixture should be defined based on the preliminary laboratory test results.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

OKETON MOD 1223 S can be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product can be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers should be used within the storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"OKETON\" MOD 1223 S normal plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 0,4-1,2%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [123] => Array ( [id] => 123 [status] => 1 [title] => "AntiAir" 250 normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 365 [product_id] => 123 [language] => en [title] => "AntiAir" 250 normal plasticizer-concrete admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

AntiAir 250 is an alcohol oils and ammonia salt based, air entraining concrete admixture, designed to form stable micro air bubbles to entrain air inside concrete at optimal intervals and under control, and to increase strength of concrete during freezing and melting periods.

Conformance code: 04.613/1-G. The product conforms to the requirements of the AZS 221-2006 (TS EN 934-2) standard, Table 5: “Air entraining concrete admixture”.

Fields of Application

This concrete admixture can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. When using AntiAir 250 admixture only, mix the mineral adhesives (cement, quartz sand, volcanic cinders, slag) with concrete fillers till the mixture is entirely homogeneous. After 50-70% of the total required amount of water is added, start to add the AntiAir 250 product together with the remained amount of water to the mixture.  Use electronic balance with ±3% accuracy. In case of frequent  use of AntiAir 250 the amount and temperature of the concrete, as well as mixer type, capacity and period of mixing should be kept constant for each mixing. Alteration of these parameters results in change of entrained air volume. To provide required air entraining property the mixing period should be defined preliminary; the data obtained in laboratory tests and during factory concrete production may differ. If necessary, determination of air entraining capacity may be checked again when mixing.

Chemical admixtures reaction principleThe admixtures react mainly with adhesives. When the admixture is added to the concrete it is absorbed by the adhesive particles. The adhesive particles are repelled from each other under the effect of electrostatic force. Thus, the smaller amounts of water provide the required application conditions. The concrete mechanical strength increases proportionally to the reduction of water content in the mixture.

Compatibility to other admixtures. AntiAir 250 may be used together with the following materials:

Technical specifications

Composition of product

alcohol oil and ammonia salt based

Color:

brown

Density

1.00-1.02 kg/liter

Chlorine concentration in the composition (EN 480-10)

<0.1%

Alkalies concentration in the composition (EN 480-12)

<10.0%

Package:

10 kg cans,

200 kg casks,

1000 kg barrels,

Special transport containers

The parameters have been received at the +200C temperature and 50%  humidity.

Consumption

It is recommended to add the AntiAir 250 product in proportion of 0.09-0.2% of the cement amount. In case it is used together with other plasticizers and in order to obtain the same air entraining capacity, it should be added in smaller amounts compared to individual use of the product. Depending on the concrete type and characteristics, the actual amount of the admixture should be determined based on preliminary laboratory tests.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

AntiAir 250 can be stored in original packing in the areas with ambient temperature equal to or above +50C. The product stored in unsuitable conditions and exposed to freezing temperatures should be melted at room temperature without adding water, then it should be mixed using mechanical methods till it is entirely homogeneous. When mixing compressed air should not be used.

Under the required storage conditions, the product can be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date. The product in open containers should be used within the storage period provided the cap is kept closed.

Warnings

-  entrainment of the required amount  of air entraining by the hardened concrete;

-  required air porosity  due to air bubble size and concrete application areas;

-  collection of durable materials together in a single point, their correct packing, location, hardening technologies and methods.

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"AntiAir\" 250 normal plasticizer-concrete admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement kütləsinin 0,09-0,2%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [124] => Array ( [id] => 124 [status] => 1 [title] => "İzoSem" 330 gr waterproofing admixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 368 [product_id] => 124 [language] => en [title] => "İzoSem" 330 gr waterproofing admixture [description] => [more] =>

Product description

İzoSem is a cement based, waterproofing high quality white color powder admixture, used in plastering, levelling, and concrete works.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the mixture. The product contains hydrophobic chemical substances. When  preparing plaster or concrete mixture add one package of the İzoSem product to each sack of cement, and mix them. Then add water to the mixture.

Application. The İzoSem product can be applied using all recommended methods of  mixed plaster, self-smoothingfloor leveller or concrete preparation.

Recommendations. The İzoSem product should be mixed twice after adding to the powder mix. Then water should be poured. Do not add the İzoSem product after pouring water to the mixed solution.

Technical specifications

Color:

White

Operating temperature

+50C - +320C

Specific weight

0.4 kg/l

Package:

330 g laminated sealed packages

Consumption

To prepare 300 kg/m3 of mixture one package (330 g) of the İzoSem product should be added to each 50 kg sack of Portland cement. In this case cost-effective, waterproof and high-strength surface is formed.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 2 years in dry and cool conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"İzoSem\" waterproofing admixture","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Sement əsaslı suvaqda olan sement kütləsinin 0,66%. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [125] => Array ( [id] => 125 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA KÜR" 100 paraffin-based concrete curing compound [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 371 [product_id] => 125 [language] => en [title] => "MA KÜR" 100 paraffin-based concrete curing compound [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Paraffin based solution applied onto freshly poured concrete and Staltop surfaces by means of spraying. The solution creates a layer on the treated surface. This layer retains required degree of moisture providing full hydration of cement. The МА Kur 100 product prevents shrinking of treated concrete surface during the period of hardening, as well as on this reason small cracks do not occur on the surface. As a result an even surface is formed.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Before application of the МА Kur 100 product the surface should be thoroughly cleaned, regardless from its conditions.

Application. Spray the МА Kur 100 product onto freshly poured concrete and Staltop surface to provide as equal thickness as possible. In case the product is applied onto horizontal surfaces start spraying procedure immediately after loss of gloss by the concrete surface. In case the product is sprayed onto the concrete in formworks, the process should be started immediately after removal of the formworks.

Recommendations. If at the time of the МА Kur 100 product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Technical specifications

Color:

White

Appearance of resulting final layer

Transparent, even, waterproof layer

Density

1.0 kg/liter

Hardening period

2 hours 45 minutes

Packing

1-, 4-, 10-, 20-liter cans and 200 liter barrels

Consumption

1 liter of the МА Kur 100 product is enough to treat 5.6 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months in original sacks in dry conditions

Warnings

parameters indicated above have been received on the basis of laboratory tests conducted in the ambient conditions of +230C±20C temperature and 50% + 5% humidity. Depending on the actual ambient conditions these parameters are subject to change.

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA KÜR\" 100 paraffin-based concrete curing compound","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [126] => Array ( [id] => 126 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA KÜR" 200 styrol rezin-based concrete curing compound [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 374 [product_id] => 126 [language] => en [title] => "MA KÜR" 200 styrol rezin-based concrete curing compound [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Styrene resin based product applied onto freshly poured concrete and Staltop surfaces by means of spraying. The product retains required degree of moisture in concrete, and provides obtaining smooth surfaces preventing shrinkage of concrete treated surface and formation of small cracks by means of elongation of the fast hardening period.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Before application of the МА Kur 200 product the surface should be thoroughly cleaned.

Application. Spray the МА Kur 200 product onto freshly poured concrete surface to provide as equal thickness as possible, or apply it onto the surface using a roller. In case the МА Kur 200 product is applied onto the concrete in formworks start spraying procedure immediately after loss of gloss by the concrete surface (after removal of the formwork)..

Recommendations. If at the time of the МА Kur 200 product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C- +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Technical specifications

Color:

Transparent

Appearance of resulting final layer

Transparent, smooth, waterproof layer

Operating temperature

+50C - +320C

Hardening period

45 minutes

Density

0.82 kg/liter

Packing

1-, 4-, 10-, 20-liter cans and 200 liter barrels

Consumption

1 liter of the МА Kur 200 product is enough to treat 5.8 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months in original sacks in dry conditions

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA KÜR\" 200 styrol rezin-based concrete curing compound","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [127] => Array ( [id] => 127 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA KÜR" 300 epoxide rezin-based concrete curing compound [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 377 [product_id] => 127 [language] => en [title] => "MA KÜR" 300 epoxide rezin-based concrete curing compound [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Hydrocarbon based product to be applied onto freshly poured concrete and Staltop surfaces by means of spraying. The product retains required degree of moisture in the concrete, and provides obtaining even surface preventing shrinkage of concrete treated surfaces and formation of small cracks, as it elongates the fast hardening period.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. Before application of the МА Kur 300 product the surface should be thoroughly cleaned.

Application. Spray the МА Kur 300 product onto freshly poured concrete surface to provide as equal thickness as possible, or apply it onto the surface using a roller. In case the МА Kur 300 product is applied onto the concrete in formworks the spraying procedure should be started immediately after loss of gloss by the concrete surface (after removal of the formwork).

Recommendations. If at the time of the МА Kur 300 product application the ambient temperature exceeds the limits of +50C - +300C range, then the required temperature level should be provided. The product should not be used in warm (above +300C), rainy and windy weather conditions. After use all hand tools and devices should be cleaned with water.

Technical specifications

Color:

Oily yellow

Appearance of resulting final layer

Transparent, smooth, waterproof layer

Operating temperature

+50C - +320C

Hardening period

45 minutes

Density

0.92 kg/liter

Packing

1-, 4-, 10-, 20-liter cans and 200 liter barrels

Consumption

170 gram of the МА Kur 300 product is enough to treatment 1 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

The product can be stored during 12 months in original sacks in dry conditions

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA KÜR\" 300 epoxide rezin-based concrete curing compound","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [128] => Array ( [id] => 128 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA OİL" 100 form (mould) oil for concrete moulds [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 380 [product_id] => 128 [language] => en [title] => "MA OİL" 100 form (mould) oil for concrete moulds [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Mineral oil based product, laid in formwork to create even concrete surface, providing easy removal of wooden and steel formworks. Besides, it provides resistant of the surface to high temperatures which occur during concrete hardening.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. The surface should be clean and dry. The surface should be free of residues deteriorating adhesive force

Application. Apply the МА Oil 100 product to the surface by means of spraying or using roller. Before application of the product the formwork should be totally cleaned from concrete fragments, wooden and steel particles, snow and ice. To provide better result, apply the МА Oil 100 product in thin layer, in homogeneous conditions. Prevent accumulation of the mould oil in one spot, spread it in appropriate manner.

When spraying the distance between the spray applicator gun and the surface should be within 50-100 cm, and spraying pressure within 2-4 bar.

Recommendations. At the time of the МА OIL 100 product application the surface temperature should be between +50C- +300C. The surface treated with the product should be protected from direct sun rays, rain, wind and frost within at least 24 hours.

Technical specifications

Product composition

Mineral oil composition

Color

Oily yellow, brilliant color

Density

0.85 kg/liter

Hydrogen ion exponent

6-7 pH

Ignition temperature

above +950C

Packing

1-, 4-, 10- liter cans and 200 liter barrels

Consumption

Consumption can differ depending on the formwork type. For wooden, plywood, and steel formwork 1 liter of the МА  Oil 100 solution may be applied with a roller onto approximately 25 m2 surface; when spraying with pumps under the pressure of 2 - 4 bar the it may cover the surface of approximately  40 m2.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

For short-term storage periods the product packages may be placed one upon the other in three layers, and at the time of application the lower layer packages should be used first. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another.

The product can be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date in corresponding storage conditions. The product in open cans may be used during entire storage period provided the covers are kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA OİL\" 100 form (mould) oil for concrete moulds","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [129] => Array ( [id] => 129 [status] => 1 [title] => "MA OİL" 200 form (mould) oil for concrete moulds [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 383 [product_id] => 129 [language] => en [title] => "MA OİL" 200 form (mould) oil for concrete moulds [description] => [more] =>

Product description

Mineral oil based product, laid in formworks to create even concrete surface, provides easy removal of wooden and steel formwork. Besides it provides the surface resistance to high temperatures, which occur during concrete hardening, and may be mixed with water.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedures

Preparation of the surface. The surface should be clean and dry. The surface should be free of residues deteriorating adhesive force

Application. Apply the МА Oil 200 product into the formwork by means of spraying or using a roller, after thorough mixing with water at 1/7-1/12 proportion. Before application of the product the formwork should be totally cleaned from concrete fragments, wooden and steel particles, snow and ice. To provide better results, apply the МА Oil 200 mixture into the formwork in thin layer, in homogeneous conditions. Prevent accumulation of the mould oil at one spot, spread it in appropriate manner.

When spraying the distance between the spray applicator gun and surface should be within 50-100 cm, and spraying pressure within 2-4 bar.

Recommendations. At the time of the МА OIL 100 product application the surface temperature should be between +50C- +300C. The surface treated with product should be protected from direct sun rays, rain, wind and frost for 24 hours.

Technical specifications

Color

Oily yellow

Product composition

Mineral oil composition

Density

0.83 kg/liter

Hydrogen ion exponent

6-7 pH

Ignition temperature

above +950C

Packing

1-, 4-, 10-liter cans and 200 liter barrels

Consumption

1 liter of the МА Oil 200 product can cover 45-80 m2 surface.

Shelf Life and Storage Method

For short-term storage periods the product packages can be placed one upon the other in three layers, and at the time of application the lower layer product packages should be used first. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one upon another.

The product may be stored during 12 months from the manufacturing date in corresponding storage conditions. The product in open cans may be used during storage period provided the caps are kept closed.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"MA OİL\" 200 form (mould) oil for concrete moulds","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [130] => Array ( [id] => 130 [status] => 1 [title] => "BENAFTON" admixture, intensifying grinding, increasing flowing ability of concrete and hardening time [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 386 [product_id] => 130 [language] => en [title] => "BENAFTON" admixture, intensifying grinding, increasing flowing ability of concrete and hardening time [description] => [more] =>

Product description

BENAFTON is an insoluble, oil refining, brown liquid being formed after the distillation of naphthenic acid. It contains up to 95% naphthenic acid.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application. Use the Benafton admixture after weighing it on a corrected (electronic) weighing scale. Apply this admixture in a recommended amount by means of dripping into the system in the I or II chamber of clinker, limestone or gypsum mills, or directly onto the transporter carrying clinker, limestone and gypsum to the system.

Technical specifications

Color:

Brown colored liquid

Density

0,98 kg/liter

Chlorine

Non

Alcalies

Non

Packing:

10 kg cans, 200 kg casks, 1000 kg barrels, equipment with special tanks

 

Consumption

Apply the product in the amount of 0,2-0,6 % of the grinded raw material (limestone, gypsum, clinker).

Shelf Life and storage

The unopened product can be stored during 12 months in dry conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"BENAFTON\" admixture, intensifying grinding, increasing flowing ability of concrete and hardening time","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => Quru qarışığın (əhəngdaşı, gips, sement) çəkisinin 0,2-0,6 %-i qədər. [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [131] => Array ( [id] => 131 [status] => 1 [title] => "TRİNOLA" 1 admixture, intensifying grinding and creating hydrophobicity [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 389 [product_id] => 131 [language] => en [title] => "TRİNOLA" 1 admixture, intensifying grinding and creating hydrophobicity [description] => [more] =>

Product description

It is a chemical cement admixture intensifying clinker grinding, applied in the production of any type of cement, increasing productivity, and providing the production of high-quality cement.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application. Use the Trinola admixture after weighing it on a corrected (electronic) weighing scale. Apply this admixture in a recommended amount by means of dripping into the system in the I or II chamber of clinker, limestone or gypsum mills, or directly onto the transporter carrying clinker, limestone and gypsum to the system.

Technical specifications

Color:

Brown

Density

1,12 kg/liter

Chlorine amount

0,1 %

Packing:

10 kg cans, 200 kg casks, 1000 kg barrels, equipment with special tanks

Special transport containers

Consumption

0,4-2,0 kg of the product can be applied for 1 ton cement production. The consumption can change in accordance with preliminary laboratory researches.

Shelf Life and  storage

The product can be stored in unopened packages during 12 months in dry conditions at the temperature within +50C and +300C.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"TRİNOLA\" 1 admixture, intensifying grinding and creating hydrophobicity","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 t [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [132] => Array ( [id] => 132 [status] => 1 [title] => "TRİNOLA" 2 admixture, intensifying grinding and creating hydrophobicity [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 392 [product_id] => 132 [language] => en [title] => "TRİNOLA" 2 admixture, intensifying grinding and creating hydrophobicity [description] => [more] =>

Product description

It is a chemical cement admixture intensifying clinker grinding, applied in the production of any type of cement, increasing productivity, and providing the production of high-quality cement.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Application procedure

Application. Use the Trinola 2 admixture after weighing it on a corrected (electronic) weighing scale. Apply this admixture in a recommended amount by means of dripping into the system in the I or II chamber of clinker, limestone or gypsum mills, or directly onto the transporter carrying clinker, limestone and gypsum to the system.

Technical specifications

Color:

Brown

Density

1,14 kg/liter

Chlorine amount

0,1 %

Packing:

10 kg cans, 200 kg casks, 1000 kg barrels, equipment with special tanks

Special transport containers

Consumption

0,4-2,0 kg of the product can be applied for 1 ton cement production. The consumption can change in accordance with preliminary laboratory researches.

Shelf Life and storage

The product can be stored in unopened packages during 12 months in dry conditions at the temperature within +50C and +300C.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"TRİNOLA\" 2 admixture, intensifying grinding and creating hydrophobicity","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [133] => Array ( [id] => 133 [status] => 1 [title] => "UnterMix 1580 AL" dry-mixed concrete to dry injection accelerators with high addition [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 395 [product_id] => 133 [language] => en [title] => "UnterMix 1580 AL" dry-mixed concrete to dry injection accelerators with high addition [description] => [more] =>

Product description

UnterMix 1580 Al is a product accelerating the hardening of shotcrete.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of surface. The surface should be thoroughly removed of any fat, rust, paraffin, and other residues preventing adhesion, there should not be any residues remained on the surface. To save the adhesion, the surface should be cleaned with high-pressure water, and the product should be applied onto wet surface.

Selection of cement. To prevent negative effect on the period of hardening, fresh cement should be used. It is recommended to apply portland cement or sulfate-resistant cement to provide quick hardening of gunite.

Preparation of mixture. To provide acceleration of hardening in the time of application add the  UnterMix 1580 Al  product to the cement in the amounts preliminary defined in laboratory researches. In case the UnterMix 1580 Al  product is directly added to the mixture contained in the transmixer, cement hydration process will start, and separate balls will be formed in the concrete in the transmixer unless the fractions (cement, quartz sand and etc.) are dry. Optimal water amount determined by the operator during the application eliminates these disadvantages. In case the amount of water is little, the period of hardening of shotcrete is shortened, and vice versa. That is why, water in the amount which is enough for hydration process should be added to dry concrete mixture.

Application. The rotary mixed concrete should be sprayed onto the surface with a spray gun.

Technical specifications

Color:

Beige (yellowish light-brown)

Pouring volumetric weight

0,9-1,0 kg/liter

Acidity (ph)

~11,0

Chlorine amount (EN 480-10)

<0,1

Packing:

In 15 kg sacks

Consumption

Consumption of the UnterMix 1580 Al product depends on concrete, surface and air temperature. Another important factor is compatibility of the product with the cement used. To do this, prior tests should be done for the purpose of determination of corresponding consumption.

Depending on an application area, period of hardening, and resistance, the UnterMix 1580 Al  dry mix can be applied in the amount between 4-8% of the mass of mineral adhesive products (cement, volcanic ash, quartz sand, slag). In case the consumption exceeds the indicated limits, the final hardness limit may fall down.

Shelf Life and storage

The product can be stored during 6 months in unopened original sacks placed one on another in three rows at the temperature within +50C and +400C. In case of long-term storage the product packages should not be laid one on another.  Unpacked sacks should be used within 1 week in the relevant storage conditions.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"UnterMix 1580 AL\" dry-mixed concrete to dry injection accelerators with high addition","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [134] => Array ( [id] => 134 [status] => 1 [title] => "UnterMix 1162 AL" new generation hardening speed liquid for wet and dry eruption concrete [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 398 [product_id] => 134 [language] => en [title] => "UnterMix 1162 AL" new generation hardening speed liquid for wet and dry eruption concrete [description] => [more] =>

Product description

It is a new generation, alcali free, highly effective liquid accelerating the hardening process  for wet and dry shotcrete, , and providing higher resistance at final stages compared to conventional surface hardeners.

Fields of Application

This product can be applied in the following areas:

Advantages

Preparation of surface. The surface should be thoroughly removed of any kind of fat, rust, paraffin, and other residues preventing adhesion, and there should not be any residues remained on the surface. To save the adhesion, the surface should be cleaned with high-pressure water, and the product should be applied onto wet surface.

Selection of cement. To prevent negative effect during the period of hardening, fresh cement should be used. It is recommended to apply portland cement or sulfate-resistant cement to provide quick hardening of shotcrete.

Preparation of mixture. The water/cement ratio of shotcrete should be less than 0,45. This leads to the acceleration of hardening, obtaining of high initial and final strength, formation of thick layers on ceilings in more effective manner using smaller amounts of hardeners.

Application. During the application of wet system shotcrete, UnterMix 1162 is added to the concrete with a separate hose by means of pipe. During the application of dry system shotcrete, UnterMix 1162  is mixedwith water in a corresponding ratio before application. The mixture is added to the dry concrete mixture from a separate hose by means of spray gun.

Compatibility with other admixtures

The UnterMix 1162  product can be used in accordance with the following products:

Technical specifications

Color:

Transparent, brown

Composition of product

Aluminum hydroxide

Density

1,37 kg/liter

Acidity (pH)

2,5

Chlorine amount (EN 480-10)

<0,1%

Packing:

10 kg cans, 200 kg casks,

1000 kg tanks, equipment with special tanks Special transport containers

Consumption

Consumption of the UnterMix 1162 product depends on concrete, surface and air temperature. Another important factor is compatibility with cement used. For this, prior tests should be done in order to define a corresponding consumption.

Depending on the application area, period of hardening, and resistance, the UnterMix 1162 product can be applied in the amount between 3-8% of the mass of mineral adhesive products (cement, volcanic ash, quartz sand, slag). In case the consumption exceeds the indicated limits, the final hardness limit may fall down.

Shelf Life and  storage

The product should be stored at the temperature of more than +50C. In case of freezing, the product should be mixed with a mechanical mixer until it is totally homogeneous. The storage period is 3 months from the manufacturing date.

Warnings

Warranty and technical support

[meta_json] => {"title":"\"UnterMix 1162 AL\" new generation hardening speed liquid for wet and dry eruption concrete","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => Consumption rate for 1 m² [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [136] => Array ( [id] => 136 [status] => 1 [title] => AZERLIME Lime for plaster [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 404 [product_id] => 136 [language] => en [title] => AZERLIME Lime for plaster [description] => [more] =>

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Lime product for AZERLİME plaster is highly active hydration (caustic) lime made from natural limestone using a special technology. This product is added to the mixture of sand and cement, so that lime plaster is obtained.

Compliant with the requirements of  ГОСТ 9179-77 and TS EN 459-1 standards.

FIELD OF APPLICATION

It is used in plastering, masonry of walls built of brick, sawdust and other types of stones in inner and outer surfaces of buildings and in forming smooth surfaces on the floors in various areas of construction industry.

RULES OF USE

Add water in the amount of 15-18% of the mixture to the finished dry mixture, wait for 3-5 minutes, and then mix. Use ready to use plaster in plastering of the walls made with red brick, sawn stone and other types of stones, masonry works and smoothing surfaces. The amount of dry construction mixtures and water required for the preparation of the finished product is shown in the following table.

İnstruction of finished

mixture

 

Amount of mixtures

(weight)

Amount of mixtures

(scoop)

Mile for plaster

 

5,7 kg

1  scoop

Cement M300

13 kg

1  scoop

Plaster sand

81,3 kg

6  scoops

Amount of required water   

15-18 l

15-18%

 

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF LIME PLASTER

AZERLİME

Color                                                   Light gray

Usage temperature                               +50C  -+300C

Water/Lime plaster                               15-18 l water/100 kg plaster

                                                                           

Duration of use                                    120 minutes

Application thickness

minimum                                            8 mm

maximum

(by step-by-step application)               100 mm

Ready to use product density               2100 kg/m3

Product density after drying                1800 kg/m3

Strength limit in:              

bending                                             2 N/mm2          

compression                                      5  N/mm2                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       

PACKAGING

 AZERLIME the lime product for plaster is packed in 20 kg polyethylene or paper sacks, 500 and 1000 kg polyethylene Big Bag sacks.

STORAGE PERIOD AND PROCEDURE

It can be stored for a year in unopened sacks, under dry conditions, putting on top of each other and being maximum 10.

WARNINGS

Special attention is paid to the cleanliness of the water, the container and the floor when preparation of the mixture using the AZERLIME product.

Do not add any additional substance to the lime and plaster mixture other than water.

WARRANTY AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT

Information in the specifications is based on the scientific and practical knowledge;

“Mətanət A” guarantees that the product complies with the relevant technical requirements and state standards.  

Except for the works performed under the supervision of company specialists, “Mətanət A” is not responsible for any problems that may arise by the other users during the  outsources use;

The company reserves the right to change the product related to the scientific and technical development.

Contact “Mətanət  A” for technical support, or more information!

[meta_json] => {"title":"AZERLIME Lime for plaster","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [152] => Array ( [id] => 152 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 441 [product_id] => 152 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [153] => Array ( [id] => 153 [status] => 1 [title] => VENESTRO DEKORATİV DİVAR MƏCUNU [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 444 [product_id] => 153 [language] => en [title] => VENESTRO DEKORATİV DİVAR MƏCUNU [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"VENESTRO DEKORATİV DİVAR MƏCUNU","description":"VENESTRO DEKORATİV DİVAR MƏCUNU","keywords":"VENESTRO DEKORATİV DİVAR MƏCUNU"} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [155] => Array ( [id] => 155 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 450 [product_id] => 155 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [156] => Array ( [id] => 156 [status] => 1 [title] => "Akdeniz" gips suvağı [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 453 [product_id] => 156 [language] => en [title] => "Akdeniz" gips suvağı [description] =>

MƏHSUL HAQQINDA
Mala ilə vurulur.
Gips əsaslı Akdeniz Gips  suvağı istifadə imkanlarını artıran qatqılarla zəngin, istilik və səs izolyasiyasını gücləndirən, sement və qum əsaslı suvağı və gips əsaslı astar suvaq qatını əvəz edən qənaətcil, universal suvaq qarışığıdır.

AZS 052 (TS 6433) standartına uyğundur. 

İSTİFADƏ SAHƏLƏRİ

Bu məhsuldan:

ÜSTÜNLÜKLƏRİ

İSTİFADƏ QAYDALARI

Səthin hazırlanması. Səthin möhkəm olmasına diqqət etməli və səth yapışmağa mane olan qarışıqlardan (toz, yağ və s.) təmizlənməlidir. Akdeniz Gips suvağının hazırlanacağı qablar təmiz olmalıdır. İsti havada künclərdə qırılmaların olmaması və künclərin düz və dəqiq olmasından ötrü divar künclərinə xüsusi "künc profilləri" (köşe profili) yerləşdirilməlidir. Müxtəlif materialların birləşdiyi və hərəkətə məruz qala biləcək yerlərə plastik "suvaq toru" (suvaq filesi) vurulur. Əgər səth qəlibdən çıxan beton kimi hamardırsa, onu nahamar etməkdən ötrü səthi baltalamaq və s. kimi köhnə və kustar metodlardan istifadə etməyə ehtiyac yoxdur. Gələcəkdə qopma hallarının olmaması üçün  belə səthləri girintili-çıxıntılı etməkdən ötrü təbii səth ilə suvaq arasında ikitərəfli kontakt yaradan PARAKONTAKT və ya digər oxşar məhsuldan suvaq vurulmazdan ən azı 24 saat əvvəl səthə çəkmək lazımdır. Metal səthlərə Akdeniz Gips suvağı vurulmamışdan öncə səth  ROKOL Antipas məhlulu və ya digər oxşar məhsulla paslanmadan qorunmalıdır.

Qarışığın hazırlanması.10 kq-lıq toz şəklindəki Akdeniz Gips suvağı 5,5-6,0 litr suya səpin və 3-4 dəqiqə gözlədikdən sonra su ilə tam həll olunana qədər qarışdırıcı  və ya əl aləti ilə qarışdırın. Akdeniz Gips suvağı hazır olduqdan sonra ona yenidən quru qarışıq və ya su əlavə etməyin. Akdeniz Gips suvağına sudan başqa heç bir əlavə material və ya maddə qatmayın.

TƏTBİQİ
Hazır astar suvağını hörülmüş divara və tavana (yəni qum-sement qarışığı ilə suvanmamış) birbaşa vurun (adi qum-sement ilə suvanmış divar və ya tavanın üzərinə Akdeniz Gips suvağını vurmaq olar, ancaq qum-sement suvağı sağlamlığa zərərli və təmir xərcləri yüksək olduğundan onun üzərinə vurulması tövsiyə edilmir). Adətən Akdeniz Gips suvağı səthə ən azı 0,8-1,0 sm qalınlığında çəkilir. Səthin tipindən asılı olaraq Akdeniz Gips suvağının vurulma mərhələsi bitəndən 24 saat sonra əgər ehtiyac yaranarsa, Akdeniz Gips suvağı və Üzlük alçı qarışığından hazırlanmış qarışıq səthə çəkilə bilər. Bu qarışığı hazırlayarkən qarışığın tərkibində 85% Akdeniz Gips  suvağı, 15 % isə Üzlük alçının olması məsləhət görülür. Əvvəlki mərhələdən təxminən 24 saat sonra  üzlük qarışıq  hazırlanıb səthə çəkilir. Hazırlanmış Akdeniz Gips  suvağı 100-120 dəqiqə, üzlük qarışığı isə 130-150 dəqiqə ərzində işlədilməlidir. İstifadə müddəti keçmiş və ya qabıq bağlamış qarışıq atılmalıdır.

 

TÖVSİYƏLƏR
Akdeniz Gips  suvağının istifadə olunduğu mühitin temperaturu +50C-dən aşağı və +300C-dən yuxarıdırsa lazımi temperatur təmin olunmalıdır. İsti (+300C-dən yuxarı), yağışlı və küləkli havalarda istifadə edilməməlidir. Qarışdırma işində istifadə olunacaq bidon və avadanlıq hər zaman təmiz olmalıdır. Çirklənmiş qablar və alətlər qarışığın işləmə müddətini qısaldır. Avadanlıq və alətləri istifadədən dərhal sonra su ilə yuyub təmizləmək lazımdır.

TEXNİKİ GÖSTƏRİCİLƏRİ

Rəngi

ağ 

İstifadə temperaturu

+50C ÷+300C

Tətbiq qalınlığı:

  • minimum
  • maksimum

 

8-10 mm

35  mm

İstifadə müddəti

130-150 dəqiqə

Donma (bərkimə) müddəti

280 dəqiqə

Su/gips nisbəti

5,5-6.0 litr su/10 kq

Quruma müddəti

təqribən  3-4 gün

Möhkəmlik həddi:

  • əyilmədə
  • sıxılmada

 

2,0 MPa

4,1 MPa

  • Quru halda məhsulun tökmə sıxlığı
  • İstifadəyə hazır məhlulun sıxlığı

 

0,73 kq/litr

1,60 kq/ litr

Səthin möhkəmliyi

54 Shore D

Qablaşdırma

30 kq-lıq laminasiyalı polipropilen kisələrdə, 

 2 və ya 3 qatı kraft kağızı  və 1 qatı polietilendən ibarət 30 kq-lıq  kisələrdə


SƏRFİYYATI  

Akdeniz Gips suvağından istifadə zamanı 1 m2 sahədə  minimum 8-10 mm qalınlıq üçün sərfiyyat 9 kq-dır. 1 kisə Akdeniz Gips suvağı (30 kq-lıq) təxminən 3 m2 səth almaq üçün kifayət edir.

SAXLAMA MÜQQDƏTİ VƏ QAYDASI

Paketlənmiş kisələr döşəməyə toxunmamaq şərti ilə qapalı yerlərdə,  taxta altlıqlar üzərində, bir-birinin üstündə maksimum 10 ədəd olmaqla  quru anbarlarda 6 ay saxlanıla bilər.

XƏBƏRDARLIQ

ZƏMANƏT VƏ TEXNİKİ DƏSTƏK

[more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [157] => Array ( [id] => 157 [status] => 1 [title] => "AĞDAĞ DİREK Saten" gips və perlit əsaslı üzlük suvağı [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 456 [product_id] => 157 [language] => en [title] => "AĞDAĞ DİREK Saten" gips və perlit əsaslı üzlük suvağı [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [158] => Array ( [id] => 158 [status] => 1 [title] => "Akdeniz Sıva" gips və perlit əsaslı astar şpatklyovkası (alçı) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 459 [product_id] => 158 [language] => en [title] => "Akdeniz Sıva" gips və perlit əsaslı astar şpatklyovkası (alçı) [description] =>

MƏHSUL HAQQINDA

Gips əsaslı, məhsulun istifadə imkanlarını artıran qatqılarla zəngin, yüksək keyfiyyətli, perlitli astar suvağıdır.

AZS 052 (TS 6433) standartına uyğundur.

İSTİFADƏ SAHƏLƏRİ

İSTİFADƏ QAYDASI

Səthin hazırlanması. İstifadə olunacaq səthlərin sağlam, quru, təmiz və ölçülərinin düzgün olmasına diqqət etməli, səth yapışma müqavimətini zəiflədən hər növ yağ və parafin qalıqlarından tamamilə təmizlənməlidir. Səthdə 5-6 mm dərinliyində çatlar və ya boşluqlar olarsa, onlar bir gün əvvəl Filkret 300 və ya 400 təmir qarışığı ilə və ya standartlara uyğun digər məhsulla doldurulmalıdır. Eyni zamanda istifadə olunacaq səth əvvəlcədən nəmləndirilməli və ya ROKOL astarla və ya standartlara uyğun digər məhsulla astarlanmalıdır.

Qarışığın hazırlanması. 10 kq-lıq quru qarışığı 5,5-6,0 litr suya səpin və 3-4 dəqiqə gözlədikdən sonra, suda hissəciklər tam qarışana kimi qarışdırıcı və ya əl aləti ilə qarışdırın. Astar hazır olduqdan sonra ona yenidən quru qarışıq və su əlavə etməyin.

Tətbiqi. Hazır AKDENİZ sıva məhsulunu sement və qum əsaslı suvaqla suvanmış səthə vurun. Astar suvağı səthə ən azı 3-5 mm qalınlığında çəkin. Səthin tipindən asılı olaraq AKDENİZ sıva məhsulunun sərfi dəyişə bilər. Astar suvağın vurulma mərhələsi bitəndən 24 saat sonra üzlük şpatklyovkadan hazırlanmış qarışıq səthə çəkilə bilər. AKDENİZ sıva məhsulu 90-120 dəqiqə  ərzində  işlədilməlidir. İstifadə müddəti keçmiş və ya qabıq bağlamış qarışıq istifadəyə  yararsızdır.

Tövsiyələr. Astar suvaq istifadə olunarkən mühitin və səthin temperaturu minimum +50C olmalıdır. İstifadə olunan mühitin temperaturu +50C-dən aşağı və +300C-dən yuxarıdırsa, lazımi temperatur təmin edilməlidir. İsti (+300C-dən yuxarı), yağışlı və küləkli havalarda istifadə olunmamalıdır. Qarışığın hazırlanmasında istifadə olunan bidon və avadanlıqlar hər zaman təmiz olmalıdır. Avadanlıq və alətləri istifadədən sonra dərhal su ilə yuyub təmizləmək lazımdır. Çirklənmiş qablar və alətlər qarışığın işləmə müddətini qısaldır. 

TEXNİKİ GÖSTƏRİCİLƏRİ

Rəngi

ağ 

İstifadə temperaturu

+50C ÷+300C

Minimum tətbiq qalınlığı

3 mm

İstifadə müddəti

90 - 120 dəqiqə

Bərkimə  müddəti

200 - 220 dəqiqə

Su/gips  nisbəti

5,5-6,0 litr su /10 kq gips

Quruma müddəti

təqribən  2-3 gün

Möhkəmlik həddi:

  • əyilmədə
  • sıxılmada

 

1,7 MPa

3,8 MPa

  • Quru halda məhsulun tökmə sıxlığı
  • İstifadəyə hazır məhlulun sıxlığı

0,7 kq/ litr

1,5 kq/ litr

Səthin möhkəmliyi

50 Shore D

Sərfiyyat

4-5 kq/m2

Saxlanma müddəti

6 ay

Qablaşdırma

30 kq-lıq laminasiyalı polipropilen kisələrdə,   2 və ya 3 qatı kraft kağızı  və 1 qatı polietilendən ibarət 30 kq-lıq  kisələrdə

 

 XƏBƏRDARLIQLAR

ZƏMANƏT VƏ TEXNİKİ DƏSTƏK

[more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [159] => Array ( [id] => 159 [status] => 1 [title] => "Akdeniz Saten" gips əsaslı üzlük şpatklyovkası (alçı) [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 462 [product_id] => 159 [language] => en [title] => "Akdeniz Saten" gips əsaslı üzlük şpatklyovkası (alçı) [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [161] => Array ( [id] => 161 [status] => 1 [title] => "Blokplaster" 25 kq gips əsaslı inşaat materiallarının hörgü yapışdırıcısı [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 468 [product_id] => 161 [language] => en [title] => "Blokplaster" 25 kq gips əsaslı inşaat materiallarının hörgü yapışdırıcısı [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [162] => Array ( [id] => 162 [status] => 1 [title] => "Siraz" gips 15 kq [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 471 [product_id] => 162 [language] => en [title] => "Siraz" gips 15 kq [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"\"Siraz\" gips 15 kq","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [163] => Array ( [id] => 163 [status] => 1 [title] => "Siraz" gips 30 kq [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 474 [product_id] => 163 [language] => en [title] => "Siraz" gips 30 kq [description] =>

MƏHSUL HAQQINDA

Təbii gips daşının lazımi temperaturda bişirilməsindən alınan yüksək keyfiyyətli, ekoloji təmiz, ağ rəngli inşaat gipsidir. AZS 046 (TS 370) standartına uyğundur.

İSTİFADƏ SAHƏLƏRİ

ÜSTÜNLÜKLƏRİ

İSTİFADƏ QAYDALARI

Səthin hazırlanması. Lepka (dekorativ gips məmulatı) və paduqaları yapışdırmazdan əvvəl divar və tavan səthlərin yoxlanılmış və möhkəm olmasına diqqət etməli, səthi yapışmağa mane olan qalıqlardan təmizlədikdən sonra hamar və düz səth almaq üçün AĞDAĞ astar və AĞDAĞ üzlük şpatklyovkalarından və ya standartlara uyğun istehsal edilmiş digər bu tipli təmir məhsullarından divar və tavanın suvanmasında istifadə edilməlidir.

Qarışdırılması.10 kq-lıq Siraz gips –i 30 saniyə ərzində hissə-hissə 6,5-7,0 litr suya səpin və 2-3 dəqiqə ərzində xüsusi qarışdırıcı və ya əl aləti ilə qarışdırın.

Tətbiqi. Alınan qarışıqdan binaların daxilində inşaat məqsədi ilə, dekorativ gips məmulatların (lepka və paduqa) hazırlanmasında, arakəsmə gips tavaların və lövhələrin hazırlanmasında istifadə edin. Hazırlanmış qarışığı 8-10 dəqiqə ərzində işlədin. İstifadə müddəti keçmiş qarışığı istifadə etməyin.

Tövsiyələr. İstifadə zamanı mühitin və səthin temperaturu minimum +50C olmalıdır. Siraz gipsin istifadə olunduğu mühitin temperaturu +50C-dən aşağı və +300C-dən yuxarıdırsa, lazımi temperatur təmin edilməlidir. İsti (+300C-dən yuxarı), yağışlı və küləkli havalarda istifadə olunmamalıdır. Qarışığın hazırlandığı bidon və avadanlıqlar hər zaman təmiz olmalıdır. Avadanlıq və alətləri istifadədən dərhal sonra su ilə yuyub təmizləmək lazımdır. Çirkli qablar və alətlər qarışığın işləmə müddətini qısaldır.

Dekorativ məmulatlar hazırlanarkən kəndir və ya süni liflərdən istifadə edilməsi tövsiyə olunur. Gipsin daxilinə kəndir və ya xüsusi liflər yerləşdirməklə məmulatların sınma və qırılma riskini azaltmaq mümkündür.

TEXNİKİ GÖSTƏRİCİLƏR
 

Rəngi

İstifadə temperaturu

+50 C÷+30 0C

Bərkimə müddəti:

  • başlanğıc
  • son

8 -10 dəqiqə
15 -20 dəqiqə

Yayılma miqyası

120 -180 mm

Su udma qabiliyyəti

34 -36 %

Su/gips nisbəti

6,5 -7,0 litr su/10 kq gips

Quruma müddəti

təqribən 1 gün

Möhkəmlik həddi:

  • əyilmədə
  • sıxılmada

4,5 Mpa
10,0 MPa

  • Quru halda məhsulun tökmə sıxlığı
  • İstifadəyə hazır məhlulun sıxlığı

0,64 kq/ litr

1,48 kq/ litr

Səthin möhkəmliyi

120-125 Shore D

Qablaşdırma

30 kq-lıq laminasiyalı polipropilen kisələrdə,

2 və ya 3 qatı kraft kağızı və 1 qatı polietilendən ibarət

25 kq-lıq kisələrdə

SƏRFİYYAT
Sərfiyyatı dəyişkəndir. İstifadə zamanı itkinin olmamasına görə eyni çəkili digər gipslərlə müqayisədə quru litrə ağırlığı az olduğuna görə Siraz gips daha məhsuldar olub, 5% daha artıq lepka və paduqa hazırlamağa imkan verir. Bu da 100 kisə 30 kq-lıq Siraz gips üçün 150 kq qənaət deməkdir.

SAXLANMA MÜDDƏTİ VƏ QAYDASI

Paketlənmiş kisələr döşəməyə toxunmamaq şərti ilə qapalı yerlərdə, taxta altlıqlar üzərində, bir-birinin üstündə maksimum 10 ədəd olmaqla, quru anbarlarda 6 ay saxlanıla bilər.

XƏBƏRDARLIQLAR

ZƏMANƏT VƏ TEXNİKİ DƏSTƏK

[more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [164] => Array ( [id] => 164 [status] => 1 [title] => "Siraz" gypsum 40 kg [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 477 [product_id] => 164 [language] => en [title] => "Siraz" gypsum 40 kg [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [165] => Array ( [id] => 165 [status] => 1 [title] => "Akdeniz Kartonpiyer" alç [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 480 [product_id] => 165 [language] => en [title] => "Akdeniz Kartonpiyer" alç [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [166] => Array ( [id] => 166 [status] => 1 [title] => "Siraz Pudra" gypsum 30 kg [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 483 [product_id] => 166 [language] => en [title] => "Siraz Pudra" gypsum 30 kg [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [167] => Array ( [id] => 167 [status] => 1 [title] => "AĞDAĞ FugaPlaster" 10 kg of intermediate filling mixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 486 [product_id] => 167 [language] => en [title] => "AĞDAĞ FugaPlaster" 10 kg of intermediate filling mixture [description] =>

Materialın keyfiyyətini, istifadə imkanlarını, çatlamaya qarşı müqavimətini, səthin hamarlığını və elastikliyini artıran qatqılarla zəngin gips əsaslı qarışıqdır.

[more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [168] => Array ( [id] => 168 [status] => 1 [title] => "AĞDAĞ FugaPlaster" 25 kg of intermediate filling mixture [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 489 [product_id] => 168 [language] => en [title] => "AĞDAĞ FugaPlaster" 25 kg of intermediate filling mixture [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [169] => Array ( [id] => 169 [status] => 1 [title] => "Blokplaster" masonry adhesive of gypsum-based construction materials [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 492 [product_id] => 169 [language] => en [title] => "Blokplaster" masonry adhesive of gypsum-based construction materials [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [174] => Array ( [id] => 174 [status] => 1 [title] => ROKOL Universal rəng pastası [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 507 [product_id] => 174 [language] => en [title] => ROKOL Universal rəng pastası [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [175] => Array ( [id] => 175 [status] => 1 [title] => ROKOL Rəng pastası [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 510 [product_id] => 175 [language] => en [title] => ROKOL Rəng pastası [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [176] => Array ( [id] => 176 [status] => 1 [title] => Rokol Silikon [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 513 [product_id] => 176 [language] => en [title] => Rokol Silikon [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [177] => Array ( [id] => 177 [status] => 1 [title] => ROKOL poliüretan köpük [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 516 [product_id] => 177 [language] => en [title] => ROKOL poliüretan köpük [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [178] => Array ( [id] => 178 [status] => 1 [title] => "PARMAWOOD" parket və taxta yapışqanı [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 519 [product_id] => 178 [language] => en [title] => "PARMAWOOD" parket və taxta yapışqanı [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [179] => Array ( [id] => 179 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 522 [product_id] => 179 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [180] => Array ( [id] => 180 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 525 [product_id] => 180 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [181] => Array ( [id] => 181 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 528 [product_id] => 181 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [182] => Array ( [id] => 182 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 531 [product_id] => 182 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [184] => Array ( [id] => 184 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 537 [product_id] => 184 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [185] => Array ( [id] => 185 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 540 [product_id] => 185 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [186] => Array ( [id] => 186 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 543 [product_id] => 186 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [187] => Array ( [id] => 187 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 546 [product_id] => 187 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) [188] => Array ( [id] => 188 [status] => 1 [title] => [defaultTranslation] => Array ( [id] => 549 [product_id] => 188 [language] => en [title] => [description] => [more] => [meta_json] => {"title":"","description":"","keywords":""} [consumption_name] => [consumption_str] => [pdf] => [video] => ) ) )